From c45fa1c882cb9650a3fac92c925f31a758a3bc8b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Richard Mahn Date: Tue, 31 Jan 2023 08:55:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH] Stephen's Edits to 2CO (#3117) Co-authored-by: stephenwunrow Co-authored-by: Richard Mahn Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/3117 --- tn_1TH.tsv | 423 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++-------------------------- tn_2CO.tsv | 64 ++++---- 2 files changed, 247 insertions(+), 240 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_1TH.tsv b/tn_1TH.tsv index 3ebed8bc06..c591b9e784 100644 --- a/tn_1TH.tsv +++ b/tn_1TH.tsv @@ -1,210 +1,215 @@ Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of 1 Thessalonians\n\nIn this letter, the apostle Paul, along with Silvanus and Timothy, encourages and makes appeals to the Thessalonian church (See: rc://*/tw/bible/names/thessalonica.md). Paul is the spokesman for all of them, using “we” to refer to the group, but in certain places Paul speaks for himself using “I” (See [2:18](../02/18.md); [3:5](../03/05.md); [5:27](../05/27.md)). The background story for the apostles’ activity in Thessalonica can be found in Acts 17:1–10.\n\n1. Apostolic memories of the Thessalonian church (1:1–10)\n * Greeting (1:1)\n * Thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2–4)\n * Examples of Thessalonian suffering (1:6–10)\n2. Apostolic authority (2:1–16)\n * Persecution of the church (2:1–13)\n * Opposition to the church (2:14–16)\n3. Timothy’s visit to Thessalonica (3:1–13)\n * Reason for the visit (3:1–5)\n * Report about the visit (3:6–13)\n4. Apostolic teachings (4:1–18)\n * Holiness (4:1–8)\n * Christian love (4:9–12)\n * Manner of the Second Coming of Christ (4:13–18)\n5. Final teachings (5:1–28)\n * Timing of the Second Coming of Christ (5:1–10)\n * Final appeals and teachings (5:11–28)\n\n### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?\n\nPaul wrote 1 Thessalonians, writing with the agreement of Silvanus and Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Saul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, Paul traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire, telling people about Jesus. Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible.\n\nSilvanus is also mentioned in 2 Corinthians 1:19; 2 Thessalonians 1:1; 1 Peter 5:12. “Silas,” the name used in the book of Acts, is a contracted form of Silvanus; Silas and Silvanus are considered to be the same person. Timothy was leader of the church at Ephesus (See 1 Timothy 1:1–4). Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth with these two men. The mention of all three men in 1:1 indicates they were in Thessalonica together at some point.\n\n### What is the book of 1 Thessalonians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the church in the city of Thessalonica, after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. Ancient Thessalonica was located on the southeast coast of ancient Macedonia, and is now called Thessaloniki, located in northeast Greece. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background). In this letter Paul said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave (See Acts 17:1–10).\n\nPaul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### Trinity\n\nIn this letter, the doctrine of the Holy Trinity finds solid support. The terms: God, Father, Son, Lord, Jesus, and Holy Spirit appear numerous times. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/god]])\n\n### The gospel\n\nIn this letter, Paul frequently refers to the apostles’ ministry of the gospel and uses different phrases to communicate the concept of God’s good news about Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])\n\n### Prayer\n\nPaul reassures the Thessalonians that his group of apostles frequently prays for them (See [1:2](../01/02.md)). He also gives instructions about prayer (See [5:2](../05/02.md)), and asks the Thessalonians to pray for them (See [5:25](../05/25.md)). (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/pray]])\n\n### Faith and Faithfulness\n\nThrough the letter the Thessalonians are commended for their faithfulness to God. They are reminded to trust God and remain faithful to gospel living. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n### Apostolic authority\n\nMuch of this letter is a defense of the apostles authority, based on their teaching and living. The term “apostles” is used in [2:6](../02/06.md)) to reinforce that Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy are sent by God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])\n\n### Second Coming of Christ\n\nPaul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.\n\n### The fate of reposed Christians\n\nPaul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians, for some of them worried that those Christians who died would miss the great “day of the Lord” when Jesus returns.\n\n### Idolatry\n\nThe Greek and Roman cultural background in Thessalonica meant that many members of the church were former pagans who practiced some sort of idolatry (See [1:9](../01/09.md)(See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/image]]).\n\n### Suffering\n\nMuch of this letter addresses both the sufferings of the apostles and the Thessalonian church for faithfulness to the gospel. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/afflict]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/persecute]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/suffer]])\n\n### Sanctification\n\nThe concept of holiness is prevalent in this letter. Chapter four discusses how a Christian should practice a holy life. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sanctify]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in Christ Jesus” and “in the Lord Jesus Christ” and “in God the Father” and “in the Holy Spirit”?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a union between God and Christians that includes all three persons of the Trinity. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about these kinds of expressions.\n\n### What did Paul mean by expressions like “his coming” and “the coming of the Lord Jesus” and “the coming of the Lord Jesus Christ”?\n\nPaul used “coming” in a specific way in relation to Jesus Christ to refer to the time when he will come again to earth, this time displaying his glory and power and gathering his people to himself. Depending on the nuances of your language, you may need to translate this with a special concept or word.\n\n### What did Paul mean by expressions like “the word of God” or “the word of the Lord”?\n\nThroughout this letter, Paul uses these well-known phrases or abbreviations to refer to the gospel message.\n\n### What did Paul mean by expressions like “brothers”?\n\nThroughout this letter, “brothers” is a metaphor that refers to all believers, including females. (See [1:4](../01/04.md); 2:1, 9, 14, 17; 3:7; 4:1, 6, 10, 13; 5:1, 4, 12, 14, 26, 27)\n\n### “We” and “you”\n\nIn this letter, the words “we”, “us,” and “our” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. In addition, “we”, “us,” and “our” are used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.\n\n### Major textual issues in the text of the book of First Thessalonians\n\nWhen ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts in its text the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants)\n* “Grace and peace to you” (See [1:1](../01/01.md)). Some other manuscripts read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”\n* “but we became little children in the midst of you, as if a mother might comfort her own children” (See [2:7](../02/07.md)). Some other manuscripts read, “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.”\n* “Timothy, our brother and a servant of God” (See [3:2](../03/02.md)). Some other manuscripts read: “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1:intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 1 General Notes\n\n## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 1\n\n1. Greeting (1:1)\n2. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian church (1:2–10)\n* Memory of the Thessalonians (1:2–5)\n * apostolic prayers (1:2)\n * work of the Thessalonians (1:2–3)\n * God’s election of the Thessalonians (1:4–5)\n* Thessalonians’ example (1:6–10)\n * reception of the apostles’ teaching (1:6)\n * examples to Macedonia and Achaia (1:7–10)\n * example of suffering (1:7)\n * preaching of the gospel (1:8)\n * turned away from idolatry to God (1:9)\n * waiting for the Second Coming of Christ (1:10)\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nVerse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.\nVerses 2–4 give a general thanksgiving and encouragement to the Thessalonian church.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Trinity\n\nGod the Father, God the Son, and God the Holy Spirit are mentioned numerous times in this chapter. They are described in their identity, activity, and the union that the Christian has in them.\n\n### Hardship\n\nLike the apostles before them, the Thessalonian church endured persecution for the sake of the gospel. The way that they responded with faith to the gospel message even in affliction and then preached that gospel to others made them examples to the churches throughout the regions of Macedonia and Achaia.\n\n### Faithfulness\n\nPaul mentions the faithfulness of the Thessalonian church throughout this chapter. See, for example, “work of faith” in 1:3, “example to all those who believe” in 1:7, and “faith toward God” in 1:8. -1:1 ms5e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Here Paul omits some words that a sentence would need in order to be complete in many languages. Alternate translation: “We are Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, writing to the church” (See rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis) -1:1 zivb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 **Paul** is understood to be the author of this letter. **Silvanus and Timothy** are with him as he writes and are in agreement with what he writes. If that might not be understood in your language, you could include this information in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, together with Silvanus and Timothy, write” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1:intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Greeting (1:1)\n2. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian church (1:2–10)\n * Memory of the Thessalonians (1:2–5)\n * apostolic prayers (1:2)\n * work of the Thessalonians (1:2–3)\n * God’s election of the Thessalonians (1:4–5)\n * Thessalonians’ example (1:6–10)\n * reception of the apostles’ teaching (1:6)\n * examples to Macedonia and Achaia (1:7–10)\n * example of suffering (1:7)\n * preaching of the gospel (1:8)\n * turned away from idolatry to God (1:9)\n * waiting for the Second Coming of Christ (1:10)\n\nVerse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type in which the senders identified themselves and the recipient and then gave a greeting.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Trinity\n\nGod the Father, God the Son, and God the Holy Spirit are mentioned numerous times in this chapter. Paul can speak of each of them individually, but he describes them working together as God. Make sure that your translation distinguishes between Father, Son, and Holy Spirit but still identifies them as God. \n\n### Imitators and examples\n\nIn [1:8](../01/08.md), Paul describes how the Thessalonians became “imitators” of the apostles and of Jesus. They became “imitators” when they suffered but still experienced joy from the Holy Spirit. Paul then describes how this behavior made them “examples” for other believers to imitate (see [1:7–8](../01/07.md)). Make sure that your translation indicates that the Thessalonians are imitating the apostles and Christ, which means that other people should imitate them. \n\n### The second coming\n\nIn [1:10](../01/10.md), Paul refers to the “second coming,” a specific day in the future in which Jesus will come back to earth, all dead people will come back to life, the world will be renewed, and God will judge people, punishing those who have sinned but rewarding those who believe in Jesus and obey him. Paul’s focus in this verse is especially on God’s judgment. Consider whether your readers will infer this information from what Paul says in [1:10](../01/10.md) or whether you should include some of this implied information. +1:1 ms5e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and its intended audience. For example, you may want to indicate that this is a letter. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, along with Silvanus and Timothy, wrote this letter to you, the church” (See rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) +1:1 zivb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 **Paul** is the author of this letter. **Silvanus and Timothy** are with him as he writes and are in agreement with what he writes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, together with Silvanus and Timothy, write” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1:1 r7n0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σιλουανὸς 1 The name **Silvanus** is a longer form of the name **Silas**, the form of the name used for this same man in the book of Acts. You could choose to use the shorter form here as well, or you could choose to use the longer form here and include a footnote explaining that they are forms of the same name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -1:1 z7wu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul speaks of the believers as though they were occupying space inside of God and Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “sharing life with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1:1 vlb3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεῷ Πατρὶ καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 When **God** is called **Father** (See [1:3](../01/03.md)), it is meant to highlight his relationship to **Jesus** as “Son” (See [1:10](../01/10.md)). Here, the Old Testament title for **God**, **Lord**, is applied to **Jesus**, equating him with **God**. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -1:1 luw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 This phrase is a common biblical blessing formula and greeting (See Rom. 1:7; 1 Cor. 1:3; 2 Cor. 1:2; Gal. 1:3; Eph. 1:2; Phil. 1:2; Col. 1:2; 2 Th. 1:2; Philem. 1:3; 1 Pet. 1:2; 2 Pet. 1:2; Rev. 1:4). Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing that could be used as a greeting in your language. Alternate translation: “May God give you his grace and peace” or “I pray that God shows you favor and keeps you safe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) -1:1 qx70 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 The words **Grace** and **peace** are abstract nouns. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs or description words. If so, you could use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “We pray that God will treat you kindly and give you peaceful relationships.” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) -1:1 nn67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμῖν 1 Throughout this letter the word **you** is plural and refers to the church of Thessalonica, unless otherwise noted. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you) -1:2 of3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε & μνείαν ποιούμενοι 1 In this verse Paul describes the apostles’ prayers for the Thessalonians in two clauses. The first clause is specific, that they **give thanks to God**, and the second is general, that they are **making mention** of them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of the clauses, as done in the UST. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure) -1:2 o7cp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εὐχαριστοῦμεν & πάντοτε & μνείαν ποιούμενοι & ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Here the words **always** and **continually** are exaggerations that express the intensity and frequency of the prayers offered up to God by Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy for the Thessalonians. If your language would not use exaggeration in this way, use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We regularly give thanks … very often making mention of you” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole) -1:3 ecw0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μνημονεύοντες ὑμῶν τοῦ ἔργου τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τοῦ κόπου τῆς ἀγάπης, καὶ τῆς ὑπομονῆς τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν; 1 The main verb of this sentence is “we give thanks” (See [1:2](../01/02.md)). The phrase **remembering … before our God and Father** is an idiom that also means to thank God in prayer. The apostles are **remembering** these things about the Thessalonians and thanking God for them. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could move the phrase **before our God and Father** to follow **remembering**. Alternate translation: “offering thanks for … to our God and Father” or “gratefully mentioning to our God and Father … Christ” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom) -1:3 w769 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ ἔργου τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τοῦ κόπου τῆς ἀγάπης, καὶ τῆς ὑπομονῆς τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Paul uses three pairs of words in a possessive relationship here. The most likely meaning of this possessive relationship is that the second word of each pair is the motivation for the first word of the pair. Alternate translation: “work motivated by faith and labor because of love and endurance based on future promises” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession) -1:3 kr8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The words **in our Lord Jesus Christ** is a possessive form. The relationship between **our Lord Jesus Christ** and **hope** could refer to: (1) Jesus as the object of hope. Alternate translation: “that our Lord Jesus Christ will do what he has promised” (2) Jesus as the source of hope. Alternate translation: “that comes from our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession) -1:3 tvrg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our God and Father** refers to the one divine person who is both God and Father. This phrase is a hendiadys, since Father further describes God. Alternate translation: “God our Father” or “our Father God” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys) -1:3 v01e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our** refers to Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, and the Thessalonian church. All believers are the spiritual children of God the Father through Jesus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive) -1:4 psc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous εἰδότες 1 Here, **knowing** continues the simultaneous description of how the writers of this letter “give thanks” (See UST). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) -1:4 qx5o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἀδελφοὶ ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This phrase acts as nominal adjective that describes the Thessalonian church in relational terms. They are spiritual siblings in their relationship with the writers of the letter and beloved children in their relationship with **God** the Father (See [1:3](../01/03.md)). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1:4 erb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ 1 Throughout this letter, **brothers** is a metaphor meaning “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers in Christ.” If your readers would not understand what **brothers** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1:4 egkq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1:4 j08t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it is clearer in your language, this passive form **loved** could be changed to an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God has always loved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1:4 t70n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τὴν ἐκλογὴν ὑμῶν 1 This phrase **your election** is the direct objective of **knowing**, and it is the beginning of a result clause. The reason why the writers of this letter know that the Thessalonians have been chosen as God’s people is found in the following verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1:4 ohtl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐκλογὴν ὑμῶν, 1 Here, **election** is an abstract noun phrase. If this is unclear in your language, you could change this abstract noun to a verb form. Alternate translation: “that he chose you to belong to him,” or “that he ordained you to be his children,” or starting a new sentence, “God selected you to be his people.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1:5 jxfs rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, **because** is the marker of a result clause. The writers of this letter are certain of the “election” and identity of the Thessalonian church as God’s people [1:4](../01/04.md), **because** they received the gospel message in all the ways described in verse 5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1:5 ude4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐγενήθη εἰς ὑμᾶς ἐν λόγῳ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, καὶ πληροφορίᾳ πολλῇ 1 The writers of this letter use a contrasting clause to emphasize the multi-faceted effect of the **gospel**. Alternate translation: “our gospel preaching did not come to you as only a simple message, but even accompanied with power and the Holy Spirit and full assurance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1:5 sm4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐγενήθη εἰς ὑμᾶς ἐν λόγῳ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, καὶ πληροφορίᾳ πολλῇ 1 If it is clearer in your language, you could change this extended phrase to a simultaneous clause, framed in a positive way. Alternate translation: “our gospel message was completely validated: by our words, by a display of power, by the Holy Spirit, by your own full assurance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) -1:5 h675 ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 This phrase could refer to: (1) the **Holy Spirit** who gave the apostles the ability to preach the **gospel** powerfully. (2) the **Holy Spirit** who caused the preaching of the **gospel** to have a powerful effect in the Thessalonian church. Alternate translation: “but also empowered by the Holy Spirit” (3) the **Holy Spirit** demonstrated the truth of the **gospel** preaching through displays of **power**. Alternate translation: “but also with powerful signs from the Holy Spirit” -1:5 t1w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πληροφορίᾳ πολλῇ 1 Here, **assurance** is an abstract noun. If your language does not use the abstract noun **assurance**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit gave you full confidence” or “the Holy Spirit fully convinced you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1:5 wdr7 καθὼς οἴδατε οἷοι 1 The phrase **just as you know what kind {of men}** is used by writers of this letter to validate the gospel message, by the example of their own conduct amongst the Thessalonian Church. Alternate translation: “you even experienced for yourself what type of men” or “you are well aware how we behaved while” -1:6 cs49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ ὑμεῖς μιμηταὶ ἡμῶν ἐγενήθητε καὶ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 If your language would not use a noun for the idea behind **imitators**, you could translate this with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “And all of you mimicked us and the Lord” or “And all of you copied us and the Lord” or “And all of you behaved like us and the Lord” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) -1:6 kgjr ὑμεῖς 1 The word translated **you** is in a position that gives it special emphasis as a new topic. Use a natural way in your language to show that Paul is now going to talk about the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “on your part, you” or “you yourselves” -1:6 b607 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ Κυρίου 1 **Lord** here refers to Jesus, as in [1:3](../01/03.md). Throughout this letter, whenever Paul uses the title **Lord**, it refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include the name here. See the UST. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) -1:6 w222 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast μετὰ χαρᾶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 If it is natural in your language, you may want to indicate a contrast between this phrase and the one before it. Alternate translation: “yet in spite of that, you had joy from the Holy Spirit” or “and even so, the Holy Spirit caused you to be joyful” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast) -1:6 c2hl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, **the word** represents a message that is made up of words. It refers to the same message called “our gospel” in [1:5](../01/05.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the gospel message” or “God’s message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1:6 wura rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν θλίψει πολλῇ 1 If your language would not use the abstract noun **hardship**, you could express the idea behind it with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “while you were deeply distressed” or “as people made you suffer” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) -1:6 r7o6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ χαρᾶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 If your language would not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **joy**, you could translate this with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “you rejoiced because of the Holy Spirit” or “but remaining joyful because of the Holy Spirit” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) -1:6 ohen rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession μετὰ χαρᾶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a relationship between **the Holy Spirit** and **joy**. This relationship could be: (1) the Holy Spirit is the source of joy. Alternate translation: “with joy from the Holy Spirit” or “as the Holy Spirit caused you to rejoice” (2) joy is the response to having the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “with the joy of those who belong to the Holy Spirit” or “with joy because you belong to the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1:7 lwbm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 **As a result** indicates that what was spoken about in verse 6 caused what follows in verse 7. Use a natural way in your language to introduce verse 7 as the outcome of verse 6. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Because of that” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result) -1:7 et1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς τύπους πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐν τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Ἀχαΐᾳ 1 If your language would not use the abstract noun **example**, you could express the idea behind it with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “all the believers in Macedonia and Achaia wanted to imitate you” or “all the believers in Macedonia and Achaia started to copy how you live” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) -1:7 j1oz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν 1 Here and throughout the letter, the phrase **to all the ones believing** refers to people who believe or trust in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include that information here. Alternate translation: “to all those who trust in Jesus” or “to everyone who remains faithful to Jesus” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) -1:7 xetp ἐν τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Ἀχαΐᾳ 1 The phrases **in Macedonia** and **in Achaia** mean that **the ones believing** lived in any part of those provinces. Alternate translation: “throughout Macedonia and Achaia” or “throughout the regions of Macedonia and Achaia” or “across all of Macedonia and Achaia” -1:8 da73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἀφ’ ὑμῶν γὰρ ἐξήχηται ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 By putting **For from you** at the beginning of the sentence, Paul is emphasizing that it was the Thessalonians who have spread the word of God throughout the area. Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this. Alternate translation: “Indeed, it was from you that people heard the word of the Lord” or “Yes, you were the ones who proclaimed the word of the Lord” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure) -1:8 smjv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἀφ’ ὑμῶν γὰρ 1 This verse connects to verse 7 as an explanation of how the Thessalonian church became an example of faithfulness to God throughout Macedonia and Achaia and beyond. Use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation in your language. Alternate translation: “Certainly, from you” or “Indeed, from all of you” or “Because from you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1:8 qyk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 The phrase **the word of the Lord** refers to “the whole message of the Lord’s gospel.” Alternate translation: “the gospel message about the Lord Jesus Christ” or “the Lord’s gospel message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1:8 sht4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξήχηται 1 Here, **has been sounded out** uses a metaphor of a ringing bell or resounding instrument that can be heard from far away to describe how clearly and far the news of the Thessalonians’ faithfulness to God has spread throughout the world. If this might be misunderstood in your language, use an equivalent metaphor, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “has shone forth” or “has spread far and wide” or “has been heard” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) -1:8 esk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν 1 Here, **faith** stands for the way that the Thessalonian church lived in faithful obedience to God. If this might be misunderstood in your language, use an expanded phrase. Alternate translation: “news of the way that you trust in God” or “the report about your faithfulness toward God” or “your faithful example before God” (See rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche) -1:8 lxc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν ἐξελήλυθεν 1 Here, **your faith toward God has gone out** is a metaphor that pictures **faith** as something that can travel. This metaphor has the same meaning as the previous one about the sound of a bell going out. It means that the news of the Thessalonians’ faithfulness to God has spread very far. If this might be misunderstood in your language, use an equivalent metaphor, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “people have heard about your faith toward God in every place” or “news of your trust in God has been heard in every place” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) -1:8 wtg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 The phrase **into every place** is a hyperbole. If this might be misunderstood in your language, use plain language. Alternate translation: “all over the inhabited world” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole) -1:8 z9eu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε μὴ χρείαν ἔχειν ἡμᾶς λαλεῖν τι 1 **Therefore** marks what follows as the result of what came before. Because the gospel message and the faithful model of the Thessalonian church were so effective, the writers of this letter have no need to add anything to it. Use a natural way in your language to show this result relationship. Alternate translation: “This is why we have no reason to say anything more” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result) -1:9 nsws rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **For** is used to emphasize and explain why the writers of this letter do not need to **say anything** [1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “Because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1:9 rd2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ γὰρ περὶ ἡμῶν ἀπαγγέλλουσιν 1 The writers of the letter use the pronoun **themselves** to emphasize at least two things: (1) These are the same people who heard about the Thessalonians’ gospel message and way of life. (2) The way the writers of this letter know that the Thessalonians’ gospel message and way of life has spread “into every place” is from the **report**. Alternate translation: “Those people who heard about the Thessalonian church tell” or “These same people proclaim” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -1:9 vq7j αὐτοὶ & ἀπαγγέλλουσιν 1 Alternate translation: “these same people are sending out the message” or “they themselves are proclaiming” -1:9 v145 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁποίαν εἴσοδον ἔσχομεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 If your language does not use the abstract noun **reception**, you can express that idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “how readily you received us” or “how enthusiastically you welcomed us” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) -1:9 xeff rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁποίαν εἴσοδον ἔσχομεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Paul implies that the **kind of reception** they had from the Thessalonians was a good one. If that would not be understood by your readers, you could indicate it explicitly. Alternate translation: “what a good reception we had from you” or “how gladly you welcomed us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1:9 dkv4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πῶς ἐπεστρέψατε πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν 1 Here, the phrase **how you turned** is an idiom that simply refers to the fact that they turned, not to the manner of how they turned. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “that you turned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1:9 wpbm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐπεστρέψατε πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν ἀπὸ τῶν εἰδώλων, δουλεύειν Θεῷ ζῶντι καὶ ἀληθινῷ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could combine the two phrases **to God** and **to serve the living and true God** into one phrase. Alternate translation: “you turned from serving the idols to serve the living and true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1:9 u1um rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπεστρέψατε πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν ἀπὸ τῶν εἰδώλων 1 Paul speaks of the Thessalonian believers as if they had been facing toward their **idols** and then **turned** around to face toward God. He means that they no longer worship idols, but now they worship God. If this metaphor might be misunderstood in your language, use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you started worshiping God and left the idols behind” or “you abandoned the idols so that you could worship God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1:9 fa47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal δουλεύειν 1 Here, **to serve** introduces a purpose clause. The reason why these people stopped worshiping idols was in order to serve God. Use a natural method of introducing a purpose clause in your language. Alternate translation: “in order to begin serving” or “for the purpose of serving” or “so that you could serve” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal) -1:9 gv76 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἀπὸ τῶν εἰδώλων, δουλεύειν Θεῷ ζῶντι καὶ ἀληθινῷ 1 This phrase expresses parallelism, by contrasting the deadness and falseness of idols with the living and real God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1:9 ou5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ τῶν εἰδώλων, δουλεύειν Θεῷ ζῶντι καὶ ἀληθινῷ 1 By using the terms **living and true** to describe God, Paul is implying that these terms do not apply to the idols or to the gods that those idols represent. The idols themselves are made of materials that are not alive. The gods that they represent are living beings, but they are not **true** gods, because people do not owe them obedience or worship as they do to the God who created them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include this information in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “from worshiping the non-living statues of false gods in order to serve the real God who is alive” or “from the dead idols in order to serve the God who lives and deserves our worship” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) -1:10 wkt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal καὶ ἀναμένειν τὸν Υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν 1 The phrase **and to wait** adds a second purpose for which the Thessalonian believers stopped worshiping idols. Use a natural method for connecting this as another purpose clause in your language. Alternate translation: “and also to wait expectantly for the second coming of his Son from heaven” (See the Introduction to 1 Thessalonians, Part 2, for a discussion of the Second Coming of Christ.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1:10 og49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Υἱὸν αὐτοῦ 1 **Son** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God the Father. Alternate translation: “God’s only Son” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples) -1:10 wil8 ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν 1 Here, the phrase **from the heavens** expresses the spiritual place where God is and where Jesus is currently located. It is the place from where he will return to the physical location of Earth. Make sure that your translation means this and not merely “the sky.” Alternate translation: “from the place where God is” or “from God’s realm” -1:10 pmi8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃν ἤγειρεν ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν, Ἰησοῦν, 1 Here, **whom** is a reference to **Son**, who is the same person as Jesus. Also, **he** and **his** refer back to God in [1:9](../01/09.md). So, it is God who raised Jesus from the dead. You can make the subject, God, explicit in your translation if the use of the pronoun is unclear in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom God raised from the dead” or “whom God resurrected from the dead. This is Jesus” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns) -1:10 ffro rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Here, the phrase **the dead** is plural and a common biblical concept that refers to “dead people.” It means that Jesus physically died and was buried. If your language has a word or phrase for the place that dead people go, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “from the place where dead people are” or “from death” or “from the place where corpses are” or “from the grave” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom) -1:10 dbcl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish Ἰησοῦν, τὸν ῥυόμενον ἡμᾶς 1 The clause **the one rescuing us** is functioning as an adjective that describes Jesus in his role as rescuer. It makes this action of rescuing to be a characteristic of Jesus or even a title: “the rescuer.” Translate this in a way that makes this a description of Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus, our rescuer” or “Jesus, who rescues us” or “Jesus, the one who is going to rescue us” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish) -1:10 yh5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν ῥυόμενον 1 Here, **rescuing** does not mean being taken away from God’s wrath after experiencing it. Instead, it means being taken away from any danger of experiencing God’s wrath. Alternate translation: “the one saving us” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) -1:10 pt1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 This is an inclusive use of **us**, including Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, and the Thessalonians–and by extension—all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “all of us Christians” or “we who trust in Christ” or “all of us believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1:10 g3zz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης 1 Here, **wrath** is an abstract noun referring to the destined **coming** of God’s future and final Judgment. If it is clearer in your language, you could translate this as a verb form. Alternate translation: “from the future time when God punishes those who do not trust in him” or “when God will certainly punish those who worship idols” or “from God’s impending judgment” (See: [What is the “second coming” of Jesus?](../front/intro)) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1:10 cx5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης 1 Paul speaks of **wrath** as though it were something that could travel and is **coming** to where people are. He means by this that in the future an event will happen when God will act wrathfully against people who have sinned and who have not trusted in Jesus to forgive their sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment that will happen” or “when God will punish people for sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 2 General Notes\n\n## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 2\n\n1. Apostolic Suffering (2:1–13)\n* Apostolic preaching (2:1–6)\n* Apostolic conduct (2:7–9)\n* Apostolic witness (2:10–3)\n2. Persecution of the Church (2:14–16)\n* Thessalonian persecution (2:14a)\n* Jewish persecution (2:14b–16)\n3. Paul’s Desire to Visit (2:17–20)\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe first part of this chapter is a defense of their apostleship and sufferings. The second part is a recounting of the Thessalonian church’s sufferings. Lastly, the apostle Paul makes known his deep desire to visit the Thessalonian church.\n\n## “We” and “You”\n\nIn this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Apostolic witness\n\nHere, Paul defends how he, Silvanus, and Timothy are God’s apostles. By their preaching, conduct, and witness, they prove to be authorized messengers of Christ. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]])\n\n### The gospel of God\n\nThe foundation of the apostolic witness is that they were “entrusted with the gospel” (See [2:4](../02/04.md)).The apostles’ authority makes them: “bold to speak” (See [2:2](../02/02.md)), “impart” (See [2:8](../02/08.md)), “preach” (See [2:9](../02/09.md)), and thank God that the Thessalonian church “received the word of God” (See [2:13](../02/13.md)).\n\n### The Second Coming of Christ\n\nIn this chapter is the first mention of the Second Coming of Christ in its two facets. First, Paul mentions that the persecutors of Christ’s Church will be judged by using the phrase “wrath has come upon them” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Next, Paul speaks of the “hope” and “joy” and “glory” for those who will “be saved” (See [2:16](../02/16.md)) “in the presence of our Lord Jesus Christ at his coming” (See [2:19–20](../02/19.md)). -2:1 ii5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases αὐτοὶ γὰρ οἴδατε, ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **For you yourselves know, brothers** functions as a chapter transition into the next topic, the apostles’ suffering. You could emphasize this if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “Certainly, you are fully aware” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -2:1 gpr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ & οἴδατε 1 The words **you** and **yourselves** refer to the Thessalonian church. Paul uses this emphasis to express how well the Thessalonians understand the benefit of the apostles’ previous visit. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you fully realize” or “you personally understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -2:1 tdl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Throughout this letter, **brothers** is a metaphor meaning “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See [1:4](../01/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what **brothers** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:1 r14z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -2:1 nwlt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν εἴσοδον ἡμῶν τὴν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, **our coming** is an abstract noun phrase that refers to the apostles’ previous visit (See “reception” in [1:9](../01/09.md)). If your language does not use abstract noun phrases for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun phrase with a verb form. Alternate translation: “when we visited you” or “when you received us” or “when you welcomed us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2:1 g6qq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τὴν εἴσοδον ἡμῶν τὴν & ὅτι 1 Here, **our** is exclusive, referring to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy–but not to the Thessalonian church (See [1:9](../01/09.md)). Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “when we apostles came” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -2:1 w584 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ κενὴ γέγονεν 1 Here, **has not been in vain** is a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that has the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “has proved quite beneficial” or “has definitely been worthwhile” or “has been very useful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -2:2 h9s8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 This verse provides background information about what happened when Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy were in the city of Philippi (See Acts 16–17:1–10; [1:6](../01/06.md)). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -2:2 w0qu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες, καθὼς οἴδατε, ἐν Φιλίπποις ἐπαρρησιασάμεθα ἐν τῷ Θεῷ ἡμῶν 1 **But** begins a contrasting clause emphasizing that the coming of Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy was **not in vain** [2:1](../02/01.md). The phrase **we were bold** is an emphatic contrast to the normal response one would expect from suffering. Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy are able to respond this way because their boldness comes from God. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However … God made us confident in how powerful he is” or “Instead … God encouraged us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -2:2 clqq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἀλλὰ προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες, καθὼς οἴδατε, ἐν Φιλίπποις 1 Here, **just as you know** is meant to emphasize how well the Thessalonian church understands the apostles’ suffering. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But, as you are well aware that we already suffered and were badly insulted at Philippi” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -2:2 fac4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how badly the apostles suffered. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “despite the fact that we had earlier suffered violently” or “since we already suffered being shamefully abused” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -2:2 daei rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This possessive phrase, **the gospel of God**, expresses how **gospel** relates to **God**. It can refer to three main ideas: (1) possession. Alternate translation: “God’s gospel” (2) source. Alternate translation: “the gospel from God” (3) association. “the gospel about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -2:2 v4dg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πολλῷ ἀγῶνι 1 Here, **in much struggle** can also refer to a spiritual contest or game. If your language does not use the abstract noun **struggle**, for this idea, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “although we struggled hard” or “despite how much we agonized” or “during the time we contested” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2:3 hl9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany ἡ γὰρ παράκλησις ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐκ πλάνης, οὐδὲ ἐξ ἀκαθαρσίας, οὐδὲ ἐν δόλῳ 1 Paul uses a repetitive series of phrases to describe why Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy had boldness to speak. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This list of phrases also defends how their message was “the gospel of God” (See [2:2](../02/02.md)). Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done right. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) -2:3 xg1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ γὰρ παράκλησις ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐκ πλάνης, οὐδὲ ἐξ ἀκαθαρσίας, οὐδὲ ἐν δόλῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract nouns **exhortation**, **error**, **impurity**, and **deceit**, you can express the idea behind them in another way. Alternate translation: “Certainly, when we appealed to you: we did not try to lead you astray, we did not speak impurely, we did not try to deceive you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2:3 t7ty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐκ ἐκ πλάνης, οὐδὲ ἐξ ἀκαθαρσίας, οὐδὲ ἐν δόλῳ 1 Paul uses this list of figures of speech that express a strong positive meaning by using a negative words together with words that are the opposite of the intended meaning. Here this list highlights the sincere motive and true content of the **exhortation** Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy shared with the Thessalonian church. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “was from honest, pure, sincere motives” or “was made properly, purely, and sincerely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -2:4 is1a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ καθὼς 1 Here, **but just as** is meant to contrast the negative items in [2:3](../02/03.md), and reinforce that Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy are authorized to preach the gospel. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “it is actually true that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -2:4 lfv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀλλὰ καθὼς δεδοκιμάσμεθα ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, πιστευθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 Here, **to be entrusted** expresses the result of **have been examined**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “certainly, God trusts us to proclaim the gospel because he tested and approved us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -2:4 ue4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δεδοκιμάσμεθα ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, πιστευθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 The combination of these two verbs, **examined** and **entrusted**, are meant to emphasize how the apostles are authorized to preach the gospel. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has verified that we can be trusted to proclaim his good news” or “we have passed God’s test as faithful preachers of the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2:4 m8sq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὕτως λαλοῦμεν 1 Here, **so we speak** expresses the result of having **been examined**. The reason why the apostles have confidence and authority to **speak** the gospel is because God tested and approved them. This could refer to: (1) reason for speaking. Alternate translation: “this is why we keep talking about it” (2) manner of speaking. Alternate translation: “so this is how we speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -2:4 qqj2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λαλοῦμεν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we apostles keep speaking the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2:4 b0yy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast οὐχ ὡς ἀνθρώποις ἀρέσκοντες, ἀλλὰ Θεῷ 1 Here, the word **but** contrasts **men** and **God**. Paul is indicating that **God** and **men** are different beings. Paul is also expressing the idea that the apostles’ motive for speaking the **gospel** is to please **God**, and not to be **pleasing to men**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “not to flatter people, but to please God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -2:4 bq9a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν 1 The phrase **our hearts** is a metonym for the apostles’ motives, affections, or deepest thoughts. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “what we love” or “what we ponder” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2:5 xk2o rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases οὔτε γάρ ποτε ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας ἐγενήθημεν 1 Here, the phrase **For we did not come at that time** marks a transition where the apostles defend their motives by describing their previous godly conduct. Alternate translation: “Because previously when we came, it was not to flatter you” or “Certainly we never came in order to flatter you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -2:5 u28j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany οὔτε & ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας & οὔτε ἐν προφάσει πλεονεξίας 1 Here, Paul uses a series of negative examples in [2:5–6](../02/05.md) to describe behavior that is not fitting for Christ’s apostles. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” You can use a form in your language to list things that someone should not do. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) -2:5 hqih rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὔτε γάρ ποτε ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας ἐγενήθημεν, 1 Paul places **just as you know** in a position that gives it special emphasis (See also [2:2](../02/02.md)). If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “As you are well aware, we did not previously come to flatter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -2:5 q2yh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν προφάσει πλεονεξίας 1 Here, **pretext** expresses the idea of people with greedy motives by comparing them to people wearing a mask or a disguise to cover up their evil intent. If the concept of a masking or disguising would not communicate a covering of true motives, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “disguising greedy intent” or “trying to hide greed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:5 qqia rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis (Θεὸς μάρτυς) 1 In the phrase **God {is} witness**, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “God is our witness!”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2:5 lfym rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor (Θεὸς μάρτυς) 1 The apostles are appealing to God to validate their gospel message and personal motives. They speak as if they are summoning God as a witness to testify on their behalf before a judge. If your readers would not understand what **God {is} witness** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “We swear to/by God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:6 j6c4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οὔτε ζητοῦντες ἐξ ἀνθρώπων δόξαν, οὔτε ἀφ’ ὑμῶν, οὔτε ἀπ’ ἄλλων 1 Here Paul refers to **men** to speak of any individual person. He also refers to **from you or from others** as another way of saying “all people.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “We were not looking for praise from any human being–not you or anyone else–” or “We were not hoping for any human honors from anyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -2:6 afcc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξ ἀνθρώπων δόξαν 1 If your language does not use the abstract noun **glory**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “for people to praise us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2:7 u7y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo δυνάμενοι ἐν βάρει εἶναι, ὡς Χριστοῦ ἀπόστολοι 1 With the phrase **being able to be a burden**, Paul uses a hypothetical condition to draw attention to the divine authority of the **apostles of Christ**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. This phrase could refer to: (1) authority of the apostles. “as Christ’s apostles we have authority to force obedience” (2) rights of the apostles. Alternate translation: “as Christ’s apostles, we could have burdened you by demanding financial support” (3) authority and rights of the apostles. Alternate translation: “as Christ’s apostles, we have the power to demand support and submission” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -2:7 a75z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δυνάμενοι ἐν βάρει εἶναι 1 Paul speaks of the apostles as if they were a heavy weight or pack. He means that if they wanted to, they could impose their apostolic authority in a way that could seem oppressive to the Thessalonian church. If your readers would not understand what **burden** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “although we could impose our authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:7 bslq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, **but** signals that the rest of the verse will contrast the idea of **burden**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “however” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -2:7 y3bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγενήθημεν νήπιοι ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν 1 Here, **became little children in the midst of you** is a metaphor indicating how gently the apostles treated the Thessalonian church. You could translate this with an active form, using a simile. Alternate translation: “we acted as mild as infants when we visited you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:7 bnp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν 1 Paul uses the idiom **in the midst of you** that means “spending time” or “visiting”. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “while visiting you” or “while spending time with you” or “when we were with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2:7 ag1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς ἐὰν τροφὸς θάλπῃ τὰ ἑαυτῆς τέκνα 1 The point of this comparison is that in the same way a **mother** would gently **comfort** her **children**, so the apostles gently and affectionately nurtured the Thessalonian church (See [2:8](../02/08.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as we affectionately cared for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -2:8 r8b4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὕτως ὁμειρόμενοι ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use the abstract noun **affection**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “Because we desire you so much” or “Since we yearn for you like this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2:8 q86v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὰς ἑαυτῶν ψυχάς 1 Paul uses **our own souls** to speak of the apostles’ bodies or their life. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our own selves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:9 v837 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here the connecting word **For** emphasizes that what follows is something else important that the Thessalonian church should pay attention to. Alternate translation: “Certainly,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -2:9 exw6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -2:9 tc98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τὸν κόπον ἡμῶν καὶ τὸν μόχθον 1 Here, **labor** and **toil** mean basically the same thing. The repetition emphasizes how hard the apostles worked. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases or make them active. Alternate translation: “our toilsome labor” or “how hard we worked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -2:9 ilj2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι 1 This phrase further explains **our labor and toil**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “although working night and day” or “despite the fact that we kept working night and day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -2:9 ylkl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι 1 Here, **night and day working** is an idiom for excessive labor. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “we stayed busy working” or “we never stopped laboring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2:9 kedf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἐπιβαρῆσαί τινα ὑμῶν 1 Paul speaks of the apostles as if they were a heavy weight or pack (See note at [2:7](../02/07.md)). Alternative translation, “so that none of you would have to financially support us” or “so that we would not impose on anyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:9 tw00 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal πρὸς τὸ μὴ 1 This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why the apostles worked so much. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -2:9 ezqn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Again, the phrase **the gospel of God** is used to indicate that the apostles’ message is of divine origin (See your translation at [2:2](../02/02.md)). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -2:10 re18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες καὶ ὁ Θεός 1 The apostles are appealing to the Thessalonian church and God to validate their gospel message and personal motives (See also [2:5](../02/05.md)). They speak as if they are summoning both the church and God as a witness to testify on their behalf before a judge. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “You are our witnesses, as well as God himself” or “As well as God, you could personally testify” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:10 h52a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες καὶ ὁ Θεός 1 In this phrase, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “As well as God, you could personally testify” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2:10 il3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany ὡς ὁσίως, καὶ δικαίως, καὶ ἀμέμπτως, ὑμῖν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐγενήθημεν 1 Paul uses a repetitive series of proofs of the apostles’ godly behavior in [2:10–12](../02/10.md). This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of the evidence for which the Thessalonian church and God are evoked as witnesses. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done right. Alternate translation: “just how faithfully and justly and innocently we conducted ourselves toward you believers in God” or “how we acted reverently, and fairly, and blamelessly while visiting the faithful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) -2:10 ufdv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμεῖς & ὑμῖν 1 The pronouns **You** and **you** are plural and refer to all the believers in God at Thessalonica. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “You all … among all of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -2:11 oug6 καθάπερ οἴδατε ὡς ἕνα ἕκαστον ὑμῶν 1 Again, Paul places **just as you know** in a position that gives it special emphasis (See also [2:2,5](../02/02.md)). It is another way of saying “you {are} witnesses” (See [2:10](../02/10.md)). Paul is appealing to the Thessalonian church’s own experience of the apostles’ godly behavior to prove their gospel message comes from God (See [2:9](../02/09.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “just as you each and every one of you are well aware” or “just as each one of you experienced for yourself” -2:11 i58m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς πατὴρ τέκνα ἑαυτοῦ 1 The point of Paul’s comparison is that the apostles are like fathers who model and instruct in proper behavior for their **children**. They see themselves as spiritual fathers to the Thessalonian church, so they nurture them in the Christian faith like a father would care for the overall well-being of his own children. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “like a father nurtures his own children” or “just as a father cares for his own children” or “like a father trains his own children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -2:12 m91e παρακαλοῦντες ὑμᾶς, καὶ παραμυθούμενοι, καὶ μαρτυρόμενοι & ὑμᾶς 1 Paul uses a repetitive series of verb forms to show how the apostles have instructed the Thessalonian church like caring fathers would teach their children. These words are meant to instill a sense of urgency. Alternate translation: “encouraging and building you up and acting as your witness” or “instructing you through appeals, encouragement, and our own personal example” -2:12 clhg παρακαλοῦντες & μαρτυρόμενοι 1 These verbal forms also describe the apostles’ fatherly behavior toward the Thessalonian church. These forms can be expressed in a number of ways: (1) result. Alternate translation: “with the result that we kept exhorting … testifying” (2) means. Alternate translation: “by exhorting … testifying” (3) manner. Alternate translation: “how we kept exhorting … testifying” -2:12 afop rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ περιπατεῖν ὑμᾶς ἀξίως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This phrase is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for the apostles’ appeals. He wants the Thessalonian church to live **worthy of God**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “that you must honor God by how you live” or “so that you would live how God desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -2:12 go6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς τὸ περιπατεῖν ὑμᾶς ἀξίως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form **of God** to describe how God’s people should live. Use a natural way in your language to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “to live in a way that honors God” or “to live in a way that God honors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -2:12 udek rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ περιπατεῖν 1 Here, **to walk** is a metaphor that means “to live.” If your readers would not understand what it means **to walk** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to habitually live” or “for you to continue to live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:12 v9ph rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοῦ καλοῦντος ὑμᾶς 1 This phrase gives us further information about God and describes what he is doing through the apostles’ teachings. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “he is the one who continues to summon you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -2:12 b0by rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism τοῦ καλοῦντος ὑμᾶς 1 Here, **the one calling you** is a parallelism that equates the apostles’ **exhorting**, **encouraging**, and **testifying** with God’s **calling**. See also [2:13](../02/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -2:12 vbd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ βασιλείαν καὶ δόξαν 1 This phrase, **into his own kingdom and glory**, expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **glory** describes what the **kingdom** is like. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “into his own glorious kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -2:13 au3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ διὰ τοῦτο καὶ ἡμεῖς εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῷ Θεῷ ἀδιαλείπτως 1 The phrase **And because of this** indicates that what follows are the reasons why the apostles are thankful for the Thessalonian church. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, as in the UST, to make this explicit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -2:13 zja7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole καὶ ἡμεῖς εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῷ Θεῷ ἀδιαλείπτως 1 This phrase uses exaggeration to emphasize the apostles’ gratitude (See also [1:2](../01/02.md)). Here, **constantly** does not mean “every moment.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows intense gratitude. Alternate translation: “We ourselves habitually thank” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -2:13 ruy0 ἡμεῖς 1 Here Paul uses the word **we** to emphasize how thankful the apostles are. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we personally” or “we ourselves” -2:13 ei3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ὅτι παραλαβόντες λόγον ἀκοῆς παρ’ ἡμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἐδέξασθε 1 This clause explains why the apostles are thankful. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. See UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -2:13 i39s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events ὅτι παραλαβόντες λόγον ἀκοῆς παρ’ ἡμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἐδέξασθε 1 Paul is stressing that it is **the word of God** that the apostles reported. This is why he first mentions that the Thessalonians **received the word of God** before mentioning that they **heard** it. If this is confusing in your language, you can make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “that when we told you God’s message, you heard it, and then you accepted it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) -2:13 dr6q rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, **that** marks the reasons in [2:13–14](../02/13.md) for why the apostles are thankful for the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language to express the reason why people should do things. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -2:13 zj5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ καθὼς ἀληθῶς ἐστὶν 1 Paul uses this contrasting clause to strongly negate the idea that the apostles’ message is of human origin. Use a natural way in your language for introducing an emphatic contrast. Alternate translation: “but in fact what it really is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -2:13 f6ta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγον ἀνθρώπων & λόγον Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses the phrase **the word** to represent a message that is made up of words. Here, **the word of man** refers to a message of human origin. In contrast, **the word of God** refers to the same message, called “the gospel of God” in [2:8–9](../02/08.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “a human message … God’s message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2:13 ci1e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὃς καὶ ἐνεργεῖται ἐν ὑμῖν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν 1 The apostles refer to God’s gospel message as if it were a person or tool doing work. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and God is energizing you faithful ones with this message” or “and God is activating this message among you who trust in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -2:13 z89g rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃς 1 Here, the word translated **which** could refer to **God** or **the word**. Alternate translation: “and God” or “and God’s word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -2:13 x7oi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Here, the pronoun **you** is plural and refers to all the believers in God at Thessalonica (See [2:10](../02/10.md)). Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “among all of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -2:14 mh8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background became imitators of the churches 0 Verses 14–16 provide background information about how the Thessalonian church suffered persecutions similar to the Judean church. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -2:14 xopt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** indicates that what follows is the proof of how God’s message is working among the Thessalonian church. Alternate translation: “Because” or “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -2:14 cj05 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -2:14 ij9j μιμηταὶ ἐγενήθητε & τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν 1 Here, **imitators** is a noun that can be translated with a verb (See [1:6](../01/06.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “mimicked the churches” or “imitated the churches” or “copied the behavior of the churches” -2:14 g0t5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, Paul speaks of the churches of God **in Christ Jesus** as though they were occupying space inside Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus (See also [1:1](../01/01.md)). Here, it also highlights the communion that Thessalonian believers **in Christ Jesus** have with Judean believers **in Christ Jesus** through the Holy Trinity. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “who are united to Jesus Christ” or “who share life with Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:15 a6xd rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background τῶν καὶ τὸν Κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν, καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων 1 This is the specific content of the background information about the Jewish persecution of Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -2:15 pgzz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism τῶν καὶ τὸν Κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν, καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων 1 The whole history of the persecution of God’s people is summarized in three parts: the killing of Old Testament prophets, the crucifixion of the Lord Jesus, and persecution of the apostles. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -2:15 ucaz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events τῶν καὶ τὸν Κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν, καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων 1 This list of those persecuted by the Jews is not chronological, but emphasizes the order of importance and intensity of persecution. If this is confusing in your language, you can make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “who have killed the prophets, then the Lord Jesus, and finally persecuted us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) -2:15 ihh7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων; καὶ Θεῷ μὴ ἀρεσκόντων, καὶ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ἐναντίων 1 Here, **and** indicates that the following phrase is the result of Jews’ persecution. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. To emphasize God’s response toward the Jews’ persecution, you could begin a new sentence with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “have persecuted us and are enemies of all people. This is why God is continually displeased” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -2:15 tfc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism καὶ Θεῷ μὴ ἀρεσκόντων, καὶ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ἐναντίων, 1 These two phrases mean similar things. These phrases are meant to express how the Jewish persecution of Christians is the same thing as opposing God himself. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine the phrases into one clarifying idea. Alternate translation: “and they make themselves enemies of God by how hostile they are against the Jewish and Gentile churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -2:15 g6q1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ἐναντίων, 1 Paul is using the possessive form of **hostile** to describe how the persecutors of the Christian Church are characterized by a hostile attitude. Alternate translation: “characterized by being opposed to all people types” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -2:15 dmxm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐναντίων 1 A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, the word **{being}** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are opposed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2:15 u6ko rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Paul speaks about **all men** to refer to “all people types” or “the whole human race.” Here, **all men** refers to two parts of humanity represented by Jews (See [2:14](../02/14.md)) and Gentiles (See [2:16](../02/16.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to all people types” or “to all the nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -2:15 ywwr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Here, **to all men** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to express his emotions about the hostile Jews. Paul does not mean that the Jews are hostile to every individual human being. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows this emphasis. Alternate translation: “toward all of humanity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -2:15 vfyv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both **men** and women. Alternate translation: “to all humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -2:16 u012 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish κωλυόντων ἡμᾶς τοῖς ἔθνεσιν λαλῆσαι, ἵνα σωθῶσιν 1 This clause gives further information for why the Gentiles are “not pleasing to God and {are} hostile to all men” (See [2:15](../02/15.md)). If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -2:16 o0vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 Here, **Gentiles** refers to all the non-Christian nations in general, not one group of people. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “among the non-Jews” or “to all the nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -2:16 r5fi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα σωθῶσιν 1 This purpose clause gives the reason why the Jews are trying to prevent the apostles from preaching the gospel to the Gentiles. Here, **to speak** expresses the way the Gentiles **might be saved.** This clause could refer to: (1) the Jews purposely trying to keep the Gentiles from salvation. Alternate translation: “to hinder the Gentiles from being saved” (2) how the speaking is for the purpose of saving the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “in order that the Gentiles can be saved” or “for the purpose of saving the nations” The clause could also refer to both ideas. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -2:16 n2ue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ ἀναπληρῶσαι αὐτῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας πάντοτε 1 Paul speaks of the Jews’ sins as if they **fill up** a container. He means that these Jews sin so much and so extremely that they can never escape God’s **wrath**. If your readers would not understand what it means to **to always fill up** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “causing them to always reach the limit of their sinfulness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:16 z5fr rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ ἀναπληρῶσαι αὐτῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας πάντοτε 1 This result clause explains what will happen to the Jews for **forbidding** the apostles **to speak to the Gentiles**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “as a result, God will no longer forgive their many sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -2:16 jzjj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture ἔφθασεν δὲ ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ἡ ὀργὴ εἰς τέλος. 1 Paul is using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. Paul is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If the use of the past tense here is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. This phrase could refer to: (1) final judgment. Alternate translation: “In fact, final wrath will overtake them” (See also [5:9](../05/09.md)) (2) certain judgment. Alternate translation: “Certainly, their punishment has finally arrived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) -2:16 fq9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Paul uses **But** to indicate that what follows is important. Here, **But** could refer to: (1) certainty. Alternate translation: “Certainly” or “In fact” (2) contrast. Alternate translation: “However” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -2:16 uwuq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔφθασεν δὲ ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ἡ ὀργὴ 1 If your language does not use the abstract noun **wrath**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2:17 edb1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἡμεῖς δέ, ἀδελφοί 1 The phrase **But we, brothers** expresses that this is a contrasting phrase that switches the attention back to the apostles’ relationship with the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -2:17 m5sf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -2:17 yhhy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπορφανισθέντες ἀφ’ ὑμῶν 1 Since the Greek word that ULT translates as **having been separated from you** can also mean “having been orphaned from you,” Paul may be revisiting the idea where the apostles affectionately compare themselves to “little children” in [2:7](../02/07.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “since we have been apart from you, we feel like orphans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2:17 lmpu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας 1 Here, **for the time of an hour** is an idiom that indicates a short time span. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “for short time” or “for a little while” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2:17 vr7v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy προσώπῳ οὐ καρδίᾳ 1 Here, **face** represents the person or physical presence, and **heart** represents the apostles’ concerns, feelings, and affections. Though the apostles were not physically present in Thessalonica, they continued to care about and show concern for their relationship with the church there. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “by distance, not in feeling” or “in person, not in affection” or “in presence, not in concern” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2:17 yxzu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism τὸ πρόσωπον ὑμῶν ἰδεῖν ἐν πολλῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ 1 Here, **to see your face, in much desire** means the same thing as **by face, not in heart**. Paul says the same thing twice in slightly different ways to show how much the apostles desire to visit the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -2:17 jgi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πολλῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ 1 If your language does not use the abstract noun **desire**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. It can also be translated as an active phrase. Alternate translation: “for which we long passionately” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2:17 ot1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὸ πρόσωπον ὑμῶν ἰδεῖν 1 The phrase **to see your face** is an idiom meaning **to visit**. Here, it expresses the apostles’ strong desire to personally visit and share spiritual intimacy with the Thessalonian church. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to visit you” or “to spend quality time with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2:18 zlny rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases διότι 1 Here, **For** indicates that what follows is background information for why Paul had not yet visited. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “Certainly,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -2:18 pnw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐλθεῖν 1 Your language may say “go” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “to go” or “to travel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -2:18 n0jl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐγὼ μὲν Παῦλος, καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δίς 1 In this phrase, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I Paul personally tried to come twice” or “Indeed, I, Paul tried to go two times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2:18 uqg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἐγὼ μὲν Παῦλος 1 Here Paul uses the pronoun **I**, and he uses**indeed** to emphasize that he personally tried to visit the Thessalonian church. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -2:18 yj0w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δίς 1 Here, the phrase **both once and twice** means repeatedly. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “twice” or “many times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2:18 crv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 3 What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to what was expected, that Paul would visit the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “however” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -2:18 uuae rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνέκοψεν ἡμᾶς 1 Since the Greek word that ULT translates as **hindered** often means “cut off” or “beat in,” Paul may be stressing the violent nature of Satan’s obstruction. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “powerfully prevented us” or “violently obstructed us” or “cut off our route” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2:19 j7j5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion For what is our hope, or joy, or crown of boasting? Is it not even you before our Lord Jesus at his coming? 0 Paul uses these rhetorical questions here to emphasize why the apostles want to visit the Thessalonian church. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -2:19 mj9n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 Here, **hope** **joy** and **crown** are spoken of as if they were the people in the Thessalonian church. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Because who makes us hopeful? Who causes us to rejoice? Who gives us reason to boast victoriously?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -2:19 ulj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τίς γὰρ ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως? ἢ οὐχὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Some words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **{is it}** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2:19 jfak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 Here, **hope**, **joy**, and **crown of boasting** are spoken of as if these concepts were the Thessalonian church. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Because who makes us hopeful? Who causes us to rejoice? Who gives us reason to boast victoriously?”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -2:19 e7tl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 Here, **crown** refers to a laurel wreath awarded to victorious athletes. The expression **crown of boasting** means a reward for victory or for having competed well. The proof of the apostles’ success will ultimately be displayed at the Second Coming of Christ if the Thessalonian church remains faithful to God (See [4:13–5:11](../04/13/.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “reward for victory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2:19 uvb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 Paul is using this possessive form to describe either: (1) the product of boasting. Alternate translation: “crown that produces boasting” (2) the means of boasting. Alternate translation: “crown through which we boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -2:19 h7gh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **before** refers to location or sphere, used as a substitute for “in front of” or “in the presence of.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our Lord Jesus” or “in front of our Lord Jesus” or “in the sight of our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2:19 mksc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ 1 Here, **his coming** is a well-known idiom in 1–2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [3:13](../03/13.md)) or the “Day of the Lord” (See [5:2](../05/02.md)). Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this idea. Alternate translation: “at his Second Coming” or “when he arrives again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2:20 l3m0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ὑμεῖς γάρ ἐστε ἡ δόξα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἡ χαρά 1 This verse means the same thing as “our hope or joy or crown of boasting” in [2:19](../02/19.md). Paul says the same thing twice in slightly different ways to emphasize that he is genuinely pleased with the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -2:20 d8dz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς 1 Paul uses the word **you** to emphasize how the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness to God brings honor and joy to the apostles. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -2:20 nlbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὑμεῖς γάρ ἐστε ἡ δόξα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἡ χαρά 1 Here, the Thessalonian church is compared to the abstract concepts of **glory** and **joy**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Because of you, God will honor us and make us rejoice” or “Certainly, we will become glorified and rejoice because of you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -3:intro j379 0 # 1 Thessalonians 3 General Notes\n\n## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 3\n\n1. Timothy’s Visit (3:1–5)\n* Apostolic concern (3:1–2)\n* Apostolic encouragement (3:3–5)\n2. Timothy’s Report (3:6–13)\n* Good news (3:6–10)\n* Apostolic prayer (3:11–13)\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe first part of this chapter recounts Timothy’s visit to Thessalonica. The second part tells about his report to Paul and Silvanus at Athens. Lastly, the apostles offer a prayer on behalf of the Thessalonian church.\n\n## “We” and “You”\n\nIn this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Metaphor\n\nIn this chapter, the Apostle Paul uses the phrase “stand firm” in [3:8](../03/08.md) as a metaphor of faithfulness to the Gospel, and “be shaken” in [3:3](../03/03.md) as the opposite of being faithful. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])\n\nUse a building metaphor, the apostles pray that God will “strengthen the “hearts” of the Thessalonian church “blameless” (See [3:13](../03/13.md)).\n\nThe enemy of God’s people, “Satan” (See [2:18](../02/18.md)) is here called “the tempter” (See [3:5](../03/05.md)).\n\n### Hyperbole\n\nPaul uses emotional and extreme language when speaking of his memory of the Thessalonian church. “Enduring it no longer,” the apostles and especially Paul (See [3:1,5](../03/01.md)) feel compelled to find out about the spiritual condition of the church. The intensity and duration of the apostles’ prayers is described as “night and day pleading earnestly” (See [3:10](../03/10.md)).\n\n### The Second Coming of Christ\n\nHere the apostles pray that the Thessalonian church will be preserved holy when Christ comes again with all his holy ones or “saints” (See [3:13](../03/13.md)). -3:1 fqe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ μηκέτι στέγοντες, ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι ἐν Ἀθήναις μόνοι, 1 This is a result clause. Paul is explaining why he sent Timothy to Thessalonica in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “Because we could not restrain ourselves any longer, we thought it proper to stay behind in Athens alone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -3:1 zvgz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases διὸ 1 Here, **Therefore** indicates a return to the topic of a visit from the apostles (See [2:17–18](../02/17/.md)). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -3:1 amxf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole διὸ μηκέτι στέγοντες 1 This phrase uses extreme exaggeration to express the apostles’ deep desire to visit the Thessalonian church (See [2:17](../02/17.md)). The word translated **enduring** is related to the idea of keeping water out of a ship or trying to contain or holding something back. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that communicates anxious longing. Alternate translation: “Thus, since we could not bear to wait any longer” or “Therefore, because we could not ignore these emotions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -3:1 n47x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι ἐν Ἀθήναις μόνοι 1 Here, **we** and **alone** refer to Paul and Silvanus (and perhaps Timothy), since in [3:2](../03/02.md) it says, “we sent Timothy.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Silas and I thought it was good idea to remain alone in Athens” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -3:2 q1f7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 What follows the word **and** here is in contrast to Paul and Silvanus staying behind at Athens. Instead, they sent Timothy. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “even though this was true,” or “yet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -3:2 vsoo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐπέμψαμεν & ἡμῶν 1 When Paul says **we** and **our**, he is exclusively speaking of himself and Silvanus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -3:2 d8yy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν, καὶ διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This phrase gives us further information about Timothy. It is meant to clarify that he is authorized by the apostles and God himself. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “and we sent Timothy, who is our fellow worker and an authorized servant of God” or “and we sent Timothy. He is our assistant and God’s authorized servant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -3:2 yyio rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν, καὶ διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, the metaphors **our brother** and **servant** refer to **Timothy** as a fellow apostle (See [2:6](../02/06.md)). If your readers would not understand what **brother** or **servant** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he assists us and ministers for God in the preaching of the gospel about Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:2 lkvo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession καὶ διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **servant of God** could refer to: (1) a servant in general. Alternate translation: “and a minister of God” or “and assistant to God” (2) office of deacon. Alternate translation: “and a deacon of God” or “who also serves God as a deacon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -3:2 dsnc ἐν 1 The preposition **in** could refer to: (1) Timothy’s association with the gospel. Alternate translation: “associated with” or “partnering in” (2) the cause of the gospel. Alternate translation: “for the cause of” or “for the sake of” (3) the means of the gospel. Alternate translation: “through” or “by means of” -3:2 pqif rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul is most likely using the possessive form to refer to **the gospel** that is “about” **Christ**. If this is not clear in your language, you could replace **of** with “about.” Alternate translation: “about Christ” or “concerning Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -3:2 x4vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμᾶς καὶ παρακαλέσαι 1 This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why he and Silvanus sent Timothy. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that you would be confirmed and consoled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1:1 z7wu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ** to describe the union of believers with **God** and **Christ**. In this case, being **in God** and **Christ**, or united to God and Christ, identifies the Thessalonians as Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that the Thessalonians have a very close relationship with **God** and **Christ**. Alternative translation: “that is united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “in union with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1:1 vlb3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεῷ Πατρὶ καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 When **God** is called **Father**, it highlights his relationship to **Jesus** as “Son” (See [1:10](../01/10.md)). Here, the Old Testament title for **God**, **Lord**, is applied to **Jesus**, equating him with **God**. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +1:1 luw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 After stating his name and the people to whom he is writing, Paul adds a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and peace within you” or “I pray that you will have grace and peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) +1:1 qx70 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **Grace** and **peace**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I pray that God will be favorable to you and give you a peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:1 nn67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμῖν 1 Throughout this letter the word **you** is plural and refers to the Thessalonian believers, unless otherwise noted. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you) +1:1 e5eu rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **Grace to you and peace**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “Grace to you and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1:2 of3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν, μνείαν ποιούμενοι ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν ἡμῶν, ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Here Paul states what he, Silvanus, and Timothy do more specifically first (they **give thanks to God**) and then describes it more generally (they are **making mention** of the Thessalonians). If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of the clauses. Alternate translation: “We continually make mention of you in our prayers, always giving thanks to God for all of you” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure) +1:2 o7cp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντοτε & ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Paul says **always** and **continually** here as generalizations for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “very regularly … extremely often” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole) +1:2 ga1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure μνείαν ποιούμενοι ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν ἡμῶν, ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Here, the word **continually** could modify: (1) **making mention {of you}**. Alternate translation: “making mention of you continually in our prayers” (2) “remembering” in the following verse ([1:3](../01/03.md)). If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to omit the comma at the end of this verse. Alternate translation: “making mention of you in our prayers, continually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1:3 ecw0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μνημονεύοντες ὑμῶν τοῦ ἔργου τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τοῦ κόπου τῆς ἀγάπης, καὶ τῆς ὑπομονῆς τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν; 1 Here, when Paul says that he and those with him are **remembering** things **before our God and Father**, he means that they are thanking God about specific things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “gratefully mentioning to our God and Father your work of faith and labor of love and endurance of hope of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1:3 w769 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑμῶν τοῦ ἔργου τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τοῦ κόπου τῆς ἀγάπης, καὶ τῆς ὑπομονῆς τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith**, **love**, **endurance**, and **hope**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you work because you believe, and how you labor because you love, and how you endure because you hope in our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:3 s8as rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὑμῶν τοῦ ἔργου τῆς πίστεως 1 Here, Paul could be using the possessive form to describe **work** that is: (1) a result of **faith**. Alternate translation: “your work produced by faith” (2) a proof of **faith**. Alternate translation: “your work that proves that you have faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1:3 tq4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ κόπου τῆς ἀγάπης 1 Here, Paul could be using the possessive form to describe **labor** that is: (1) a result of **love** for other believers. Alternate translation: “labor produced by love for others” (2) a result of **love** for God. Alternate translation: “labor produced by love for God” (3) a proof of **love**. Alternate translation: “labor that proves that you have love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1:3 mshs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς ὑπομονῆς τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Here, Paul could be using the possessive form to describe **endurance** that is: (1) a result of **hope**. Alternate translation: “endurance produced by hope” (2) a characteristic of **hope**. Alternate translation: “enduring hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1:3 kr8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **hope** that is about **our Lord Jesus Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “of hope in our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1:3 tvrg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our God and Father** refers to the one divine person who is both God and Father. The word **God** and the word **Father** refer to the same person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “God our Father” or “our Father God” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys) +1:3 v01e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, the Thessalonians, and all believers. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive) +1:4 psc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδότες 1 Here, the word **knowing** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him give thanks to God (see [1:2](../01/02.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “that is because we know” or “since we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1:4 erb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1:4 egkq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1:4 j08t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom God is loving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1:4 ohtl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐκλογὴν ὑμῶν, 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **election**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that you have been chosen” or “that God has selected you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:5 jxfs rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, **because** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him are sure about the Thessalonians’ “election” (see [1:4](../01/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “which we are sure about because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1:5 ude4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐγενήθη εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, Paul speaks of **our gospel** as if it were a person who could **come to you**. He means that the Thessalonians heard the gospel from Paul and his fellow workers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you did not receive our gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1:5 sm4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν λόγῳ 1 Paul is using the term **word** to refer to speaking words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in speech” or “in spoken words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1:5 t1w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, καὶ πληροφορίᾳ πολλῇ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **power** and **assurance**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in us acting powerfully and in the Holy Spirit working and in us being fully assured” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:5 kjin rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, καὶ πληροφορίᾳ πολλῇ 1 Here Paul could mean that: (1) Paul and those with him preached the gospel with **power** and with the help of **the Holy Spirit** and with **much assurance** that what they preached was true. Alternate translation: “we preached with power and with the Holy Spirit and with much assurance that it is true” (2) the Thessalonians experienced **power** and **the Holy Spirit** and **much assurance** when they heard the gospel. Alternate translation: “you experienced its power and the presence of the Holy Spirit and much assurance that it is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1:5 wdr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς οἴδατε οἷοι 1 Here, the phrase **just as you know** could introduce: (1) a basis for Paul’s claim about how the Thessalonians experienced the gospel. Alternate translation: “and you know that is true because you remember what kind of men” (2) a comparison between what Paul has said about how the Thessalonians experienced the gospel and what the Thessalonians know about Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “and that fits with what you know about what kind of men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1:6 kgjr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς & ἐγενήθητε 1 Here, the word translated **yourselves** emphasizes **you**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **you** in your language. Alternate translation: “you indeed became” or “it is you who became” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +1:6 cs49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous δεξάμενοι 1 Here, the phrase **having received** could introduce: (1) the way in which the Thessalonians **became imitators**. Alternate translation: “that is, you received” (2) when the Thessalonians **became imitators**. Alternate translation: “which you did when you received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) +1:6 c2hl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, **the word** represents a message that is made up of words, specifically the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the gospel message” or “the words of the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1:6 wura rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν θλίψει πολλῇ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “while being afflicted” or “while people made you suffer” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) +1:6 r7o6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ χαρᾶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “rejoicing because of the Holy Spirit” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) +1:6 ohen rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession μετὰ χαρᾶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **joy** that is given by **the Holy Spirit**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with joy from the Holy Spirit” or “with joy given by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1:7 lwbm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces a result from how the Thessalonians became imitators of Paul, his fellow workers, and the Lord (see [1:6](../01/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “So” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result) +1:7 et1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς τύπους πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐν τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Ἀχαΐᾳ 1 If your language would not use the abstract noun **examples**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you showed all the ones believing in Macedonia and in Achaia how to behave” or “all the believers in Macedonia and Achaia started to copy how you live” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) +1:7 xetp rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ἐν τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Ἀχαΐᾳ 1 The word **Achaia** is the name of a Roman province in the southern part of modern-day Greece. The word **Macedonia** is the same of a Roman province in the northern part of modern-day Greece. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that these words are names of provinces or regions. Alternate translation: “in the regions of Macedonia and Achaia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +1:8 smjv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of how the Thessalonians became examples throughout Macedonia and Achaia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “More specifically,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1:8 da73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀφ’ ὑμῶν & ἐξήχηται ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you have sounded out the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1:8 qyk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Paul is using the term **word** to refer to the message about **the Lord**, which is the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the good news about the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1:8 sht4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξήχηται 1 Here, Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians were playing an instrument that makes a sound that can be heard from far away. He means that people in many places hear **the word of the Lord** because of how the Thessalonians act. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has shone forth” or “has been heard” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +1:8 w8b3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ἐν τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Ἀχαΐᾳ 1 See how you translated the similar phrases in [1:7](../01/07.md). Alternate translation: “in the regions of Macedonia and Achaia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +1:8 lxc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν ἐξελήλυθεν 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians’ **faith** were a person who could travel to many places. He means that people in many places have heard about their **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people have heard about your faith toward God in every place” or “news of your trust in God has been heard in every place” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification) +1:8 esk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν 1 Here, the word **faith** represents knowledge about the Thessalonians’ **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the news about your faith” or “knowledge concerning your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1:8 bvkf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way that you believe in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:8 wtg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 Here Paul speaks as if people in **every place** know about Thessalonians’ faith. The Thessalonians would have understood him to mean that their faith is known in many places, or in every place that Paul and his fellow workers visit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into every place we go” or “throughout the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +1:8 z9eu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λαλεῖν τι 1 Here Paul implies that he does not **need to say anything** about the Thessalonians’ **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “to say anything about your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1:9 nsws rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not need to say anything about the Thessalonians (see [1:8](../01/08.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “That is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1:9 vfa3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ & ἀπαγγέλλουσιν 1 Here, the phrase **they themselves** refers to everyone who has heard about the Thessalonians’ faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the pronouns more explicit. Alternate translation: “they themselves who have heard about your faith report” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1:9 rd2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ & ἀπαγγέλλουσιν 1 Here, the word translated **themselves** emphasizes **they**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **they** in your language. Alternate translation: “they indeed report” or “it is they who report” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +1:9 qraf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **us** could include: (1) just Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “us who preached the good news” (2) Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “you and us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1:9 xeff rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁποίαν εἴσοδον ἔσχομεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul refers to his and his fellow workers’ visit to the Thessalonians as an **entrance**. He implies that the Thessalonians welcomed him and that it was a good visit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “what a good visit we had with you” or “the wonderful way in which we visited you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1:9 ushe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἔσχομεν 1 Here, the word **we** refers only to Paul and his fellow workers. It does not include the Thessalonians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1:9 u1um rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπεστρέψατε πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν ἀπὸ τῶν εἰδώλων 1 Paul speaks of the Thessalonians as if they had been facing toward their **idols** and then **turned** around to face toward **God**. He means that they no longer worship idols, but now they worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you started worshiping God and left the idols behind” or “you abandoned the idols for God’s sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1:9 fa47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal δουλεύειν 1 Here, the phrase **to serve** could introduce: (1) the purpose for which the Thessalonians **turned**. Alternate translation: “in order to serve” (2) a restatement of what it means for the Thessalonians to have **turned**. Alternate translation: “that is, you chose to serve” (3) the result the Thessalonians having **turned**. Alternate translation: “with the result that you serve” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal) +1:9 ou5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Θεῷ ζῶντι καὶ ἀληθινῷ 1 Here, the phrase **living and true God** identifies God as the one who lives and is truly God. The point is that God actually lives, unlike idols and other things that people may call gods, and that God really is God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really lives and is the true God. Alternate translation: “the real God who actually lives” or “the only true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1:10 wkt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal καὶ ἀναμένειν 1 The phrase **to wait** is parallel with the phrase “to serve” in the previous verse ([1:9](../01/09.md)). Introduce it the same way you introduced “to serve.” Alternate translation: “and in order to wait for” or “and with the result that you wait for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1:10 og49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Υἱὸν αὐτοῦ 1 **Son** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God the Father. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples) +1:10 wil8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν 1 Here Paul assumes that the Thessalonians know that Jesus ascended into **the heavens** and will someday come back to earth from there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this information more explicit. Alternate translation: “to return from his place in the heavens” or “to come back to earth after he ascended into the heavens” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1:10 ffro rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἤγειρεν ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Here, the phrase **raised from the dead** refers to someone who died and came back to life. If your language does not use **raised** to describe coming back to life, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he restored to life after he had died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1:10 r3nl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +1:10 dbcl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish Ἰησοῦν, τὸν ῥυόμενον ἡμᾶς 1 The clause **the one rescuing us** is functioning as an adjective that describes Jesus in his role as rescuer. Paul is not distinguishing between more than one **Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes this explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus, our rescuer” or “Jesus, who rescues us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +1:10 pt1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Here, the word **us** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, and the Thessalonians–and by extension—all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “all of us Christians” or “all of us believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1:10 g3zz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wrath**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from the time when God punishes people” or “so that God does not punish us in the future” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:10 cx5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης 1 Paul speaks of **wrath** as though it were someone who could travel and is **coming** to where people are. He means that in the future God will act wrathfully against people who have sinned and who have not trusted in Jesus to forgive their sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment that will happen” or “when God will punish people for sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +2:intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Apostolic Suffering (2:1–13)\n * Apostolic preaching (2:1–6)\n * Apostolic conduct (2:7–9)\n * Apostolic witness (2:10–3)\n2. Persecution of the Church (2:14–16)\n * Thessalonian persecution (2:14a)\n * Jewish persecution (2:14b–16)\n3. Paul’s Desire to Visit (2:17–20)\n\nThe first part of this chapter is a description of how Paul and his fellow workers preached the gospel to the Thessalonians. The second part is a recounting of the Thessalonian church’s sufferings. The third part is an expression of Paul’s deep desire to visit the Thessalonian church.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Paul’s previous visit with the Thessalonians\n\nBefore he wrote this letter, Paul had briefly visited the city of Thessalonica and preached the gospel. He may have been in this city for only three weeks (see [Acts 17:2](../act/17/02.md)), but many people still believed in Jesus during this time. They started the church of the Thessalonians, to whom Paul wrote this letter. However, Paul had to leave the city quickly because some Jewish people started a riot and tried to seize Paul and his fellow workers. You can read about this story in [Acts 17:1–10](../act/17/01.md). In this chapter, Paul describes how he and his fellow workers acted when he visited them, and he describes how the believers responded (see [2:1–13](../02/01.md)). He also refers to how some Jewish people persecuted him and his fellow workers (see [2:15–16](../02/15.md)). Finally, he describes how he wants to visit them again after he and his fellow workers had to leave so soon (see [2:17–20](../02/17.md)). \n\n### God and the Thessalonians as “witnesses”\n\nIn [2:5](../02/05.md) and [2:10](../02/10.md), Paul names God as a “witness” to what he is saying, and he also names the Thessalonians as “witnesses” in [2:10](../02/10.md). Witnesses testify about whether something is true, so Paul names God and the Thessalonians as witnesses to show the Thessalonians that what he is saying is true. Your language may have a specific form for appealing to someone to guarantee that a statement is true. \n\n### “The Jews”\n\nIn [2:14–16](../02/14.md), Paul refers to people whom he calls “the Jews.” He does not mean Jewish people in general, since he refers to “the churches of God that are in Judea” as a separate group, and most if not all of these people were Jewish. Paul himself clarifies that he means “the ones having killed both the Lord Jesus and the prophets and having persecuted us.” This does not describe one group of people, since many of the people who killed God’s “prophets” died before Jesus came. What it does describe is a type of person: a person who opposes God and his messengers. When Paul refers to “the Jews” in this chapter, then, he is referring to Jewish people who oppose God and his messengers. You may need to make this more explicit in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Figures of speech related to families\n\nIn this chapter, Paul describes himself and his fellow workers as “little children” ([2:7](../02/07.md)), “mothers” ([2:7](../02/07.md)), and “fathers” ([2:11](../02/11.md)). He also refers to the Thessalonians as “brothers” ([2:1](../02/01.md), [9](../02/09.md), [14](../02/14.md), [17](../02/17.md)). Paul describes himself and his fellow workers in these ways to show the Thessalonians that he and his fellow workers love and care about them as if they were members of the same family. Paul especially emphasizes this since he was only with the Thessalonians for a short period of time. If possible, preserve the figures of speech that describe the Thessalonians and Paul and his fellow workers as members of the same family.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “We” and “You”\n\nIn this chapter, the words “we,” “us,” and “our” always refer to Paul and his fellow workers, particularly Silvanus and Timothy. These words do not include the Thessalonians. Also, in this chapter, the words “you” and “your” are always plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +2:1 ii5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a longer explanation of the “entrance” that Paul and his fellow workers had among the Thessalonians (see [1:9](../01/09.md)). This explanation is found in [2:1–12](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Concerning our entrance to you,” or “Now about your visit,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2:1 gpr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ & οἴδατε 1 Here, the word translated **yourselves** emphasizes **you**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **you** in your language. Alternate translation: “you indeed know” or “it is you who know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +2:1 tdl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fellow Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:1 r14z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +2:1 r6cy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν εἴσοδον ἡμῶν τὴν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, just as in [1:9](../01/09.md), Paul refers to his and his fellow workers’ visit to the Thessalonians as an **entrance**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “that our visit with you” or “that our time with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:1 g6qq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τὴν εἴσοδον ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** includes Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy but not the Thessalonians. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “the entrance of me, Silvanus, and Timothy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +2:1 w584 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ κενὴ γέγονεν 1 Paul is using a figure of speech here that expresses a strongly positive meaning by using a negative word, **not**, together with an expression that is the opposite of the intended meaning, **in vain**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the positive meaning. Alternate translation: “has definitely been worthwhile” or “has been very useful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +2:2 nt5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with how Paul and his fellow workers might have visited the Thessalonians “in vain” (see [2:1](../02/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “Instead of acting in vain,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +2:2 h9s8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες, καθὼς οἴδατε, ἐν Φιλίπποις 1 These words provide background information about what happened when Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy were in the city of Philippi. You can read about this in [Acts 16:16–40](../act/16/16.md). Use a natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “even though we suffered and were shamefully treated when we were in Philippi, just as you know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +2:2 w0qu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες 1 Here, the phrases **having previously suffered and having been shamefully treated** refer to something that contrasts with **we were bold**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could introduce the phrases **having previously suffered and having been shamefully treated** with a word or phrase that introduces a contrast or something that is unexpected. Alternate translation: “despite having previously suffered and having been shamefully treated” or “even though we suffered previously and were shamefully treated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +2:2 fac4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how badly the apostles suffered. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “having earlier suffered violently” or “having already been shamefully abused” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +2:2 f5d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑβρισθέντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having experienced shameful treatment” or “people having shamefully treated us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +2:2 clqq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἀλλὰ προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες, καθὼς οἴδατε, ἐν Φιλίπποις 1 Here Paul includes the phrase **just as you know** at the end of the information that he says they **know**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move **just as you know** to wherever it would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But, just as you know, having previously suffered and having been shamefully treated at Philippi” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +2:2 ddlx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ Θεῷ ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in God** to describe the union of believers with **God**. In this case, being **in God**, or united to God, explains how Paul and his fellow workers were able to be **bold**. Paul could mean more specifically that: (1) **God** enabled them to be bold. Alternate translation: “with boldness from God” (2) they were bold because of their union with **God**. Alternate translation: “because of our union with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:2 daei rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **gospel** that relates to **God**. More specifically, the **gospel** could: (1) come from God. Alternate translation: “the gospel that God gave us” (2) be about God. Alternate translation: “the gospel about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +2:2 v4dg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν πολλῷ ἀγῶνι 1 Here, the phrase **much struggle** could refer: (1) generally to how difficult preaching the gospel was. Alternate translation: “in great difficulty” (2) specifically to people who opposed Paul. Alternate translation: “in much opposition” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:3 hl9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of how Paul and his fellow workers spoke the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Here is how we spoke:” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2:3 xg1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ & παράκλησις ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐκ πλάνης, οὐδὲ ἐξ ἀκαθαρσίας, οὐδὲ ἐν δόλῳ 1 If your language does not use nouns for some or all of the ideas in this verse, you can express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “when we appealed to you, we did not lead you astray, nor did we speak impurely, nor did we deceive you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:3 sckc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ & παράκλησις ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul could be implying that this **exhortation** was addressed to: (1) the Thessalonians specifically. Alternate translation: “our exhortation to you” (2) anyone to whom Paul and his fellow workers proclaim the gospel. Alternate translation: “our exhortation to people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:3 mzm6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἐκ πλάνης 1 Here Paul could be implying that the **exhortation** was not **from error** because: (1) he and his fellow workers did not try to convince the Thessalonians to believe what is wrong. Alternate translation: “was neither from false teaching” (2) he and his fellow workers did not believe what is wrong. Alternate translation: “was neither from our false beliefs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:4 m8sq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καθὼς δεδοκιμάσμεθα ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, πιστευθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, οὕτως λαλοῦμεν 1 Here Paul describes the manner in which he and his fellow workers **speak** something before he says that they **speak**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange the elements so that Paul says what he is doing before he describes the manner in which he does it. Alternate translation: “we speak as those who have been examined by God to be entrusted with the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +2:4 ue4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δεδοκιμάσμεθα ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, πιστευθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has examined us to entrust us with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +2:4 lfv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result πιστευθῆναι 1 Here, the phrase **to be entrusted** introduces the result of being **examined by God**. Paul implies that God approved of them when he **examined** them, and so they were **entrusted with the gospel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces the result of a test or examination. Alternate translation: “with the result that we were entrusted with” or “and approved to be entrusted with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +2:4 qqj2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ Θεῷ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but as pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +2:4 bq9a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν 1 In Paul’s culture, the heart is the place where humans think and plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “our minds” or “what we think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2:5 xk2o rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of how Paul and his fellow workers spoke and acted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Even more,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2:5 hqih rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὔτε γάρ ποτε ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας ἐγενήθημεν, καθὼς οἴδατε 1 Here Paul includes the phrase **just as you know** in the middle of the information that he says they know. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move **just as you know** to wherever it would be natural in your language. See how you translated the similar form in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “For, just as you know, we were not at that time in a word of flattery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +2:5 qjty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ποτε 1 Here, the phrase **at that time** refers to the time when Paul and his fellow workers visited the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “at the time of our visit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:5 lkx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας 1 Paul is using the term **word** to mean a message in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in a message of flattery” or “in speech of flattery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2:5 ulcm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns λόγῳ κολακίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **flattery**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a flattering word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:5 q2yh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession προφάσει πλεονεξίας 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **pretext** that hides or disguises **greed**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a pretext for greed” or “a pretext that hides greed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +2:5 oh2o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν προφάσει πλεονεξίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **pretext** and **greed**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “by disguising how greedy we might have been” or “being greedy and trying to hide it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:5 lfym rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula (Θεὸς μάρτυς) 1 The phrase **God {is} witness** is an oath formula. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “we swear by God” or “as God knows” +2:6 afcc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξ ἀνθρώπων δόξαν, οὔτε ἀφ’ ὑμῶν, οὔτε ἀπ’ ἄλλων 1 If your language does not use the abstract noun **glory**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for men, neither you nor others, to praise us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:6 j6c4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +2:7 a75z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δυνάμενοι ἐν βάρει εἶναι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers could have made the Thessalonians carry something heavy. He means that he and his fellow workers could have made the Thessalonians’ lives harder. More specifically, the **burden** could be: (1) Paul and his fellow workers demanding respect and obedience. Alternate translation: “being able to require your obedience” (2) Paul and his fellow workers demanding money and other things. Alternate translation: “being able to demand money from you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:7 y3bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγενήθημεν νήπιοι 1 Here, Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers **became little children**. He means that they treated the Thessalonians gently and did not use their authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “we acted as mild as infants” or “we behaved gently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:7 u7y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants νήπιοι 1 Here, many ancient manuscripts read **little children**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “gentle.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +2:7 bnp2 ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “among you” or “when we visited you” +2:7 ag1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς ἐὰν τροφὸς θάλπῃ τὰ ἑαυτῆς τέκνα 1 The point of this comparison is that in the same way a **mother** would gently **comfort her own children**, so the apostles gently and affectionately cared for the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language , you could make the meaning more explicit. Alternate translation: “and we loved you like mother who affectionately cares for her own children” or “as we affectionately cared for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +2:7 q9bv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐὰν τροφὸς θάλπῃ τὰ ἑαυτῆς τέκνα 1 Here, the clause **as if a mother might comfort her own children** could be: (1) a further explanation of what Paul has already said about how they acted like **children**. Alternate translation: “in the midst of you, just as a mother might comfort her own children” (2) a description of what he is about to say about how they long for the Thessalonians (see [2:8](../02/08.md)). If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to to continue the sentence in the following verse instead of starting a new sentence there. Alternate translation: “in the midst of you. As a mother might comfort her own children,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +2:8 r8b4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὕτως 1 Here, the phrase **in this manner** could: (1) refer back to what Paul said in the previous verse about how he and his fellow workers love and care for the Thessalonians as if they were the Thessalonians’ mothers. Alternate translation: “in that very way” or “as a mother does” (2) make the word **longing** stronger. Alternate translation: “so very much” (3) refer ahead to what Paul and his fellow workers did because of their **longing**. Alternate translation: “in the following way:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:8 oxdm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὐδοκοῦμεν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we were happy” or “we considered it good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +2:8 pjp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the gospel** that relates to **God** (see the similar phrase in [2:2](../02/02.md)). More specifically, the **gospel** could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel that God gave us” (2) be about **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +2:8 q86v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς ἑαυτῶν ψυχάς 1 Here, the word **souls** represents people and focuses particularly on who people are and what they do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our own selves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2:9 v837 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Thessalonians should believe Paul when he writes that he and his fellow workers loved and cared for the them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “You know that is true because” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2:9 gxvc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:9 exw6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “siblings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +2:9 tc98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τὸν κόπον ἡμῶν καὶ τὸν μόχθον 1 Here, **labor** and **toil** mean basically the same thing. The repetition emphasizes how hard the apostles worked. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “our toilsome labor” or “how hard we worked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +2:9 ylkl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας 1 Here, the phrase **night and day** indicates that Paul and his fellow workers worked during both the day and the night. This means that they worked very much every day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “always” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2:9 kedf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἐπιβαρῆσαί τινα ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul speaks of asking for money as if it were a heavy **burden** that he and his fellow workers could have asked the Thessalonians to carry for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternative translation, “so that none of you would have to support us financially” or “in order not to make life hard for any of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:9 ezqn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the gospel** that relates to **God** (see the similar phrase in [2:8](../02/08.md)). More specifically, the **gospel** could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel that God gave us” (2) be about **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +2:10 re18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες καὶ ὁ Θεός, ὡς 1 Here Paul speaks as if he were summoning both the Thessalonians and God as **witnesses** to testify on their behalf before a judge. He means that the both the Thessalonians and God know how he and his fellow workers acted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You and God can declare how” or “You and God know how” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:10 il3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὡς ὁσίως, καὶ δικαίως, καὶ ἀμέμπτως 1 The terms **piously**, **righteously**, and **blamelessly** mean similar things. Paul is using the three terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with only one or two terms. Alternate translation: “righteously” or “properly and and purely” +2:11 oug6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς ἕνα ἕκαστον ὑμῶν, ὡς πατὴρ τέκνα ἑαυτοῦ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language (see [2:10](../02/10.md)). Alternate translation: “how we were with each one of you as a father is with his own children” or “how we treated each one of you as a father treats his own children” +2:11 i58m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς πατὴρ τέκνα ἑαυτοῦ 1 The point of Paul’s comparison is that Paul and his fellow workers are like fathers who model and instruct proper behavior for their **children**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the meaning more explicit. Alternate translation: “as a father teaches and trains his own children” or “we taught and disciplined you as fathers do with their own children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +2:12 clhg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρακαλοῦντες ὑμᾶς, καὶ παραμυθούμενοι, καὶ μαρτυρόμενοι 1 Here, the words **exhorting**, **encouraging**, and **testifying** describe ways in which Paul and his fellow workers acted like fathers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “by exhorting you and encouraging you and testifying to you” +2:12 m91e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet παρακαλοῦντες ὑμᾶς, καὶ παραμυθούμενοι 1 The terms **exhorting** and **encouraging** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “exhorting you” +2:12 obhe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μαρτυρόμενοι 1 Here Paul could be implying that he and his fellow workers testify: (1) about how believers should behave. Alternate translation: “testifying about proper behavior” (2) to the truth of the good news. Alternate translation: “testifying to the truth of the gospel” +2:12 udek rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ περιπατεῖν 1 Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were walking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to act” or “to live your lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:12 go6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἀξίως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe what **God** considers to be worthy. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a way that honors God” or “in a way that God considers worthy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +2:12 v9ph rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοῦ καλοῦντος ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul is adding more information about God. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “who is the one calling you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +2:12 vbd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ βασιλείαν καὶ δόξαν 1 Here, the phrase **kingdom and glory** could refer: (1) to two distinct things that God calls his people to participate in. Alternate translation: “into his own kingdom and his own glory” (2) to one thing described with two words connected by **and** (this is called hendiadys). Alternate translation: “into his own glorious kingdom” +2:13 au3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ διὰ τοῦτο καὶ ἡμεῖς εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῷ Θεῷ ἀδιαλείπτως, ὅτι 1 Here, the word **this** could refer to: (1) what Paul is about to write, which he introduces with the word **that**. Alternate translation: “And here is why we also thank God constantly: it is that” (2) what Paul has already written about how Paul and his fellow workers preached and how the Thessalonians welcomed them. Alternate translation: “And because of those things, we also thank God constantly, that” +2:13 ruy0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & ἡμῶν 1 Here the words **we** and **us** include Paul and his fellow workers but not the Thessalonians, so use the exclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. +2:13 qy80 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 Here, the word **also** could imply that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers thank God about the Thessalonians like other people do (see [1:8–10](../01/08.md)). Alternate translation: “we too” (2) Paul and his fellow workers are thanking God for additional things about the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “we yet again” +2:13 zja7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Paul says **continually** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. See how you translated the similar form in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “extremely often” +2:13 f6ta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγον ἀκοῆς & λόγον ἀνθρώπων & λόγον Θεοῦ 1 In this verse, Paul uses the term **word** to mean a message that is spoken by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spoken message of hearing … something spoken by men … something spoken by God” +2:13 ei3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession λόγον ἀκοῆς παρ’ ἡμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **word** that he connects with **hearing** and with **God**. He could mean that: (1) the **word** allowed the Thessalonians to hear about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word in which you heard about God from us” (2) the **word** is what the Thessalonians heard from Paul and his fellow workers, and this **word** is about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word which you heard from us about God” (3) the **word** is from **God**, and the Thessalonians heard it from Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “the word from God which you heard from us“ +2:13 inhn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of humans” or “of people” +2:13 z89g rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃς 1 Here, the word translated **which** could refer to: (1) **the word**. Alternate translation: “which word” (2) **God**. Alternate translation: “who” +2:13 ci1e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὃς καὶ ἐνεργεῖται 1 Here Paul refers to **the word of God** as if it were a person doing work. He means that God uses **the word** to work in the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through which God is also working” or “which is also effective” +2:14-15 mh8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 To help your readers understand the author’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could include what the unbelieving **Jews** did first and then include how the Thessalonians are **imitators** of the believers in Judea. Alternate translation: “For the Jews, the ones having killed both the Lord Jesus and the prophets and having persecuted us, made the churches of God that are in Judea in Christ Jesus suffer. Now you, brothers, became imitators of them, because the same things you also suffered from your own countrymen, just as they also from the Jews, the ones not being pleasing to God and {being} hostile to all men,” +2:14 xopt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces proof of how God’s message is working among the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces proof or support for a claim. Alternate translation: “We know it is working in you because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2:14 u40g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” +2:14 cj05 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. +2:14 ij9j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **churches** that belong to **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea without using the possessive form. Alternate translation: “of the churches that belong to God” +2:14 g0t5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with **Christ Jesus**. In this case, being **in Christ Jesus**, or united to Christ, explains that **churches** are truly believers and have a relationship with Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that these believers are united to Christ. Alternate translation: “and that are united to Christ Jesus” or “and that are in union with Christ Jesus” +2:14 dnw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὰ αὐτὰ ἐπάθετε, καὶ ὑμεῖς ὑπὸ τῶν ἰδίων συμφυλετῶν, καθὼς καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Here, the phrase **the same things** refers to the phrase **just as they also from the Jews**. Paul means that the Thessalonians and the believers **in Judea** experienced the same kind of suffering and persecution. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. You may need to rearrange the end of the verse to do so. Alternate translation: “you also suffered from your own countrymen exactly what they also suffered from the Jews” or “whatever they also suffered from the Jews you also suffered from your own countrymen” +2:14 f37l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τῶν ἰδίων συμφυλετῶν 1 Although the term **countrymen** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “others from your own country” or “people who live in your city” +2:14 d7qc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “they also suffered these things from” +2:14 s27y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Here Paul is referring to Jewish people who did not believe in Jesus and who persecuted those who did believe in Jesus. He is not referring to Jewish people in general, since **the churches of God that are in Judea** were mostly Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that Paul is speaking about **Jews** who did not believe persecuting other Jewish people who did believe. Alternate translation: “the Jews who did not believe in Jesus” or “the Jews who opposed Jesus” +2:15 a6xd rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background τῶν καὶ τὸν Κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν, καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων; καὶ Θεῷ μὴ ἀρεσκόντων, καὶ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ἐναντίων 1 Paul provides this background information about “the Jews” to help readers understand exactly which Jews he is speaking about. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “by which I mean the Jews who in the past killed both the Lord Jesus and the prophets and persecuted us and who are not pleasing God and who are hostile to all men” +2:15 ucaz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events τῶν καὶ τὸν Κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν, καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων 1 This list of those persecuted by the people whom Paul calls “the Jews” is not chronological, but emphasizes the order of importance and intensity of persecution. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “the ones having killed the prophets, then the Lord Jesus, and finally persecuting us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) +2:15 wg1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς προφήτας 1 Here, the phrase **the prophets** refers to the prophets who are mentioned in the Old Testament. These prophets were also Jewish and spoke God’s message to his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the Jewish prophets” or “God’s prophets” +2:15 ywwr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Paul says **all men** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “to very many men” or “to the majority of men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +2:15 vfyv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “to all men and women” +2:16 u012 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result κωλυόντων 1 Here, the word **forbidding** could introduce: (1) a reason why Paul says that the unbelieving Jews are not “pleasing to God” and are “hostile to all men” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). Alternate translation: “because they forbid” or “which is because they forbid” (2) the means by which the unbelieving Jews act in ways that are not “pleasing to God” and “hostile to all men” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). Alternate translation: “which they do by forbidding” +2:16 fo8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λαλῆσαι 1 Here Paul implies that he speaks the gospel **to the Gentiles**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to speak the gospel” +2:16 r5fi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal τοῖς ἔθνεσιν & ἵνα σωθῶσιν 1 Here, the clause **so that they might be saved** expresses the purpose for which Paul and his fellow workers **speak to the Gentiles**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the Gentiles, which we do so that they might be saved“ +2:16 ceve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σωθῶσιν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God might save them” +2:16 z5fr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἀναπληρῶσαι αὐτῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας πάντοτε 1 Here Paul is referring to how the unbelieving Jews **fill up their sins**. He does not mean that **the Gentiles** who are saved are filling up their sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “so that these unbelieving Jews always fill up their sins” +2:16 n2ue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ ἀναπληρῶσαι αὐτῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας πάντοτε 1 Here, Paul speaks of how the unbelieving Jews sin as if it were filling something up with sins. He could mean: (1) that they commit many sins all the time. Alternate translation: “so that they commit many sins at many times” (2) that they commit enough sins that God will punish them. Alternate translation: “so that they always commit enough sins for God to punish them” +2:16 jzjj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture ἔφθασεν & ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ἡ ὀργὴ 1 Here Paul could be using the past tense phrase **has come upon them** to indicate that: (1) the **wrath** will **come** in the future. In this case, Paul uses the past tense to indicate that the **wrath** is certain or will be revealed soon. Alternate translation: “the wrath will certainly come upon them” or “the wrath will soon come upon them” (2) **wrath** has already **come** when Paul wrote this letter. In this case, at the time Paul wrote this letter, the unbelieving Jews were already experiencing the **wrath**. Alternate translation: “the wrath has already come upon them” (3) God had already revealed the **wrath** would eventually **come**. In this case, people already know about the **wrath** but will experience it in the future. Alternate translation: “it has already been revealed that the wrath will come upon them” +2:16 btod rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ ὀργὴ 1 Here Paul implies that **the wrath** is God’s **wrath**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “God’s wrath” +2:16 uwuq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔφθασεν & ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ἡ ὀργὴ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wrath**, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this word in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “God has punished them” or “they will be punished” +2:16 h8ib rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς τέλος 1 Here, the phrase **to the end** could mean that God’s **wrath has come up them**: (1) completely or totally. In this case, God reveals all of his **wrath**, not just some of it. Alternate translation: “totally” or “fully” (2) at a moment at the end of a period of time. In this case, the unbelieving Jews are sinning until God finally reveals his **wrath**. Alternate translation: “finally” or “at last” (3) at the end of this world. In this case, the **end** refers to when Jesus comes back. Alternate translation: “at the end of this world” or “when Jesus returns” +2:17 edb1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δέ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces how Paul and his fellow workers act in contrast to the people that Paul has described in the previous verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” +2:17 tpp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believing friends” +2:17 m5sf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. +2:17 yhhy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπορφανισθέντες ἀφ’ ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul refers to how he and his fellow workers had to leave the Thessalonians soon after arriving in their city and preaching the good news to them. You can read about this in [Acts 17:1–10](../act/17/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having been forced to leave you” or “having had to go away from you” +2:17 ci7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπορφανισθέντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, [Acts 17:1–10](../act/17/01.md) shows that people who opposed Paul did it. Alternate translation: “opponents having separated us” or “persecution having separated us” +2:17 lmpu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας 1 Here, the phrase **for the time of an hour** refers to a short span of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar phrase or plain language. Alternate translation: “for a short time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2:17 vr7v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy προσώπῳ οὐ καρδίᾳ 1 Here, the word **face** represents physical presence, and the word **heart** represents thoughts and desires. Paul means that he and his fellow workers thought and cared about the Thessalonians (**by heart**) even though they were not physically present in Thessalonica (**by face**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by physical presence, not by feelings” or “in person, not in affection” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2:17 yxzu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet περισσοτέρως ἐσπουδάσαμεν τὸ πρόσωπον ὑμῶν ἰδεῖν ἐν πολλῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ 1 The terms **extremely eager** and **in much desire** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “greatly desired to see your face” or “became filled with much eagerness to see your face” +2:17 ot1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὸ πρόσωπον ὑμῶν ἰδεῖν 1 The phrase **to see your face** refers to visiting someone and being with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to visit you” or “to spend time with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2:17 jgi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πολλῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **desire**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “which we greatly desire” or “for which we yearn” +2:18 zlny rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases διότι 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) basis or evidence for Paul’s claim in the previous verse that he and his fellow workers were eager to visit the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “You know that is true because” (2) an inference from Paul’s claim in the previous verse about how eager he and his fellow workers were to visit the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” or “So then,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2:18 pnw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐλθεῖν 1 Your language may say “go” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Alternate translation: “to go” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +2:18 n0jl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐγὼ μὲν Παῦλος, καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δίς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “indeed I, Paul, desired to come to you both once and twice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +2:18 yj0w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δίς 1 Here, the phrase **both once and twice** could mean that: (1) Paul tried to visit the Thessalonians multiple times. In this case, Paul does not clarify how many times he tried. Alternate translation: “many times” (2) Paul tried to visit them twice. Alternate translation: “two times” or “twice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2:18 uuae rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνέκοψεν ἡμᾶς 1 Here Paul means that Satan prevented him and his fellow workers from visiting the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “prevented us from doing so” or “made it impossible for us to come” +2:19 j7j5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς γὰρ ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως? ἢ οὐχὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ? 1 Paul is using the question form to to show the Thessalonians how much he and his fellow workers value and care about them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “For here is our hope and joy and crown boasting: it is even you before our Lord Jesus at his coming!” or “For you are our hope and joy and crown of boasting before our Lord Jesus at his coming.” +2:19 mj9n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τίς & ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 In the next question, Paul identifies the **hope**, **joy**, and **crown** as the Thessalonians themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question so that Paul is asking about people instead of things. Alternate translation: “who gives us hope and joy and a crown of boasting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +2:19 jfak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τίς & ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **hope** and **joy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what makes us hopeful or joyful or gives us a crown of boasting” +2:19 uvb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **crown** that leads to or causes **boasting**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “crown about which we boast” +2:19 e7tl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 Here, the word **crown** represents the honor and recognition that someone receives for accomplishing a task or goal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “reward about which we boast” or “honor about which we boast” +2:19 hrvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants καυχήσεως 1 Here, many ancient manuscripts read **of boasting**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “of great joy.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +2:19 q7f2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καυχήσεως? ἢ οὐχὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ? 1 Here, the phrase **Or {is it} not even you** could: (1) introduce a second question that answers the first question. Paul is saying that the Thessalonians will be their **hope**, **joy**, and **crown** at Jesus’ **coming**. Alternate translation: “of boasting? In fact, is it not even you who are these things before Lord Jesus at his coming?” (2) be a second question that answers the longer question the phrase interrupts. In this case, you could use a form that marks the phrase as an interruption, or you could move it to the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “of boasting—is it not even you?—before our Lord Jesus at his coming?” or “of boasting before our Lord Jesus at his coming? Is it not even you?” +2:19 wf6q rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ 3 Here, the word **Or** introduces the correct answer to the question that Paul asked in the first half of the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a correct answer, or you could leave **Or** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” +2:19 h7gh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **before our Lord Jesus** implies that Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians will be examined by **the Lord Jesus**. Paul is confident that Jesus will approve of the Thessalonians, which will give Paul and his fellow workers honor and joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “before our Lord Jesus when he examines everyone” or “when we all are judged by the Lord Jesus” +2:19 mksc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ 1 Here, the phrase **his coming** refers to the specific time in the future when Jesus will come back to earth, judge everyone, punish unbelievers, and reward believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when he comes back to earth” or “at his return to us” +2:20 l3m0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) a restatement of the point that Paul made in the previous verse (see [2:19](../02/19.md)). Alternate translation: “Yes,” (2) the basis for the point that Paul made in the previous verse (see [2:19](../02/19.md)). Alternate translation: “That is because” +2:20 nlbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐστε ἡ δόξα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἡ χαρά 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **glory** and **joy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “cause us to feel glorious and joyful” or “glorify us and make us happy” +3:intro j379 0 # 1 Thessalonians 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Timothy’s Visit (3:1–5)\n * Apostolic concern (3:1–2)\n * Apostolic encouragement (3:3–5)\n2. Timothy’s Report (3:6–13)\n * Good news (3:6–10)\n * Apostolic prayer (3:11–13)\n\nThe first part of this chapter recounts Timothy’s visit to Thessalonica. The second part tells about his report to Paul and Silvanus at Athens. Lastly, the apostles offer a prayer on behalf of the Thessalonian church.\n\n## “We” and “You”\n\nIn this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Metaphor\n\nIn this chapter, the Apostle Paul uses the phrase “stand firm” in [3:8](../03/08.md) as a metaphor of faithfulness to the Gospel, and “be shaken” in [3:3](../03/03.md) as the opposite of being faithful. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])\n\nUse a building metaphor, the apostles pray that God will “strengthen the “hearts” of the Thessalonian church “blameless” (See [3:13](../03/13.md)).\n\nThe enemy of God’s people, “Satan” (See [2:18](../02/18.md)) is here called “the tempter” (See [3:5](../03/05.md)).\n\n### Hyperbole\n\nPaul uses emotional and extreme language when speaking of his memory of the Thessalonian church. “Enduring it no longer,” the apostles and especially Paul (See [3:1,5](../03/01.md)) feel compelled to find out about the spiritual condition of the church. The intensity and duration of the apostles’ prayers is described as “night and day pleading earnestly” (See [3:10](../03/10.md)).\n\n### The Second Coming of Christ\n\nHere the apostles pray that the Thessalonian church will be preserved holy when Christ comes again with all his holy ones or “saints” (See [3:13](../03/13.md)). +3:1 zvgz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference or result based on what Paul said in the previous verses about how he and his fellow workers desired to visit the Thessalonians (see [2:17–20](../02/17.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or result. Alternate translation: “As a result of that” or “Because of that” +3:1 fqe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result στέγοντες 1 Here, the word **enduring** could introduce: (1) the reason why Paul and his fellow workers **thought it good to be left behind**. Alternate translation: “since we could endure it” (2) the time when Paul and his fellow workers **thought it good to be left behind**. Alternate translation: “when we could endure it” +3:1 amxf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηκέτι στέγοντες 1 Here Paul implies that he and his fellow workers could no longer endure being separated from the Thessalonians and longing to see them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “enduring our separation from you no longer” or “no longer enduring how we long to see you” +3:1 n47x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive μηκέτι στέγοντες, ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι 1 Here Paul could be saying that: (1) Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy could endure no longer and together decided that Paul and Silvanus should stay in Athens. Alternate translation: “enduring it no longer, Silvanus, Timothy, and I thought it good that Silvanus and I should be left behind” (2) Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy could endure no longer and together decided that Paul should stay in Athens by himself. Alternate translation: “enduring it no longer, Silvanus, Timothy, and I though it good that I should be left behind” (3) only Paul could endure no longer and himself decided that he should stay in Athens by himself. In this case, Paul uses the plural form to refer to himself only. Alternate translation: “enduring it no longer, I thought it good that I should be left behind” (4) Paul and Silvanus could endure no longer and together decided that they should stay in Athens. Alternate translation: “enduring it no longer, Silvanus and I thought it good to be left behind” +3:1 ml5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταλειφθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to remain” or “to have everyone else leave us behind” +3:1 jvh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀθήναις 1 The word **Athens** is the name of a city. It was one of the most important cities in the country we call Greece. +3:2 vsoo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐπέμψαμεν Τιμόθεον & ἡμῶν 1 Here, the words **we** and **our** do not include the Thessalonians. Make sure that your translation fits with you chose to translate “we” in the previous verse. In this verse, the words **we** and **our** could refer to: (1) Paul and Silvanus. Alternate translation: “Silvanus and I sent Timothy, our” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I sent Timothy, my” +3:2 r42r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπέμψαμεν Τιμόθεον 1 Here Paul implies that he and Silvanus **sent Timothy** to visit the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we sent Timothy to you” +3:2 yyio rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the term **brother** to mean a person who shares the same faith with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our believing friend” +3:2 lkvo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **servant** who could: (1) serve **God**. Alternate translation: “one who serves God” (2) serve other people for God’s sake. Alternate translation: “one who serves others for God’s sake” +3:2 wykn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **a servant of God**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “a fellow worker of God.” Other ancient manuscripts read “ fellow worker.” Other manuscripts read “a servant of God and our fellow worker.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +3:2 dsnc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν 1 The preposition **in** could refer to: (1) how Timothy works to preach the gospel. Alternate translation: “in preaching” (2) the means by which Timothy serves. Alternate translation: “by means of” +3:2 pqif rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **gospel** that could be: (1) about **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the gospel about Christ” (2) be from **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the gospel from Christ” +3:2 maoe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στηρίξαι 1 Here, Paul is speaking of Timothy supporting or helping the Thessalonians in their faith as if he were making them stronger. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “help” +3:2 pizt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how you believe” 3:3 u7vo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ μηδένα σαίνεσθαι ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν ταύταις 1 If your language does not use the abstract noun **afflictions**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “so that when you are distressed, it would not make anyone waver” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:3 o4w8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal τὸ μηδένα σαίνεσθαι 1 This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for sending Timothy. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that no one would waver” or “for the purpose of keeping anyone from being deceived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 3:3 v8q7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὸ μηδένα σαίνεσθαι 1 Paul is using the adjective **no one** as a noun in order to describe the Thessalonian church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “so that no person wavers” or “in order that none of you are deceived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -226,7 +231,7 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In 3:5 ua7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo μή πως ἐπείρασεν ὑμᾶς ὁ πειράζων, καὶ 1 Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize how powerful satanic temptation can be. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “because if Satan tempted you, I wanted to find out, and then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 3:5 gnow rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ εἰς κενὸν γένηται ὁ κόπος ἡμῶν 1 This phrase could be a result clause. Paul is stating what would be the result if the Thessalonian church let Satan tempt them to stop trusting God. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “then how hard we worked would have been worthless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:5 jnzb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εἰς κενὸν 1 Here, **in vain** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to express how sad the apostles would have been if the Thessalonian church had not remained faithful to God. Paul does not really think the apostles’ **labor** is worthless. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows deep disappointment. Alternate translation: “worthless” or “purposeless” or “profitless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -3:6 esxw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nIn [3:6](../03/06.md) Paul describes Timothy’s current report about the Thessalonian church. Paul provides this background information to help his readers understand how comforted he is (See [3:7](../03/07.md)).Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) +3:6 esxw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background 0 In [3:6](../03/06.md) Paul describes Timothy’s current report about the Thessalonian church. Paul provides this background information to help his readers understand how comforted he is (See [3:7](../03/07.md)).Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) 3:6 r4pa rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἄρτι δὲ ἐλθόντος Τιμοθέου πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἀφ’ ὑμῶν 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe phrase **But just now** brings Paul’s narrative into the present time. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “But Timothy recently returned to us from visiting you” or “But now, Timothy is back to us from his visit with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:6 gci4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive πρὸς ἡμᾶς 1 This is an exclusive use of **us**, referring to Paul and Silvanus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:6 tu8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν πίστιν καὶ τὴν ἀγάπην ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use the abstract nouns **faith** and **love**, you can express the idea behind them in another way. Alternate translation: “that you remain faithful to God and love him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -275,7 +280,7 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In 4:1 p4db rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν 1 Here, **to walk** is a metaphor that means “to live” or “to obey” (See [2:12](../02/12.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means **to walk** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about how you must live” or “about how you are obligated to obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:1 ckii rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τὸ πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν καὶ ἀρέσκειν Θεῷ (καθὼς καὶ περιπατεῖτε) 1 Here, **to walk and to please** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **please** describes how the Thessalonian church should **walk**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “about how you must live to please God (exactly as you live now)” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 4:1 q937 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα περισσεύητε μᾶλλον 1 This phrase is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which apostles are begging and exhorting the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that you can excel more and more” or “in order that you thrive even more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -4:2 oyu3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background through the Lord Jesus 0 Paul is providing this background information about the apostles’ teachings during their previous visit to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) +4:2 oyu3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background 0 Paul is providing this background information about the apostles’ teachings during their previous visit to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) 4:2 dg4p rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οἴδατε γὰρ τίνας παραγγελίας ἐδώκαμεν ὑμῖν διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 This verse expresses that the Thessalonian church should do what the apostles previously taught them (See [4:1](../04/01.md)), because these teachings are actually commands from **the Lord Jesus** himself. Use a natural way in your language to express a result clause. Alternate translation: “The reason we beg and exhort you is because you realize that when we gave commands, it was actually the Lord Jesus who taught you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:2 ebjm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates that what follows is something else important that the Thessalonian church should pay attention to. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 4:2 vg16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul speaks of the **commands** that the apostles gave to the Thessalonian church as though **Jesus** personally told them to the apostles. Paul means that **Jesus** made the apostles his messengers, not that **Jesus** is a messenger of the apostles. If your readers would not understand what **through the Lord Jesus** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through a message from the Lord Jesus” or “by order of the Lord Jesus himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -380,7 +385,7 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In 5:1 i2vm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περὶ δὲ τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 Here, **Now concerning** signals a change in subject (See also [4:9](../04/09.md)). This phrase implies that the apostles are answering a specific question previously asked by the Thessalonian church about the timing of “the coming of the Lord” and how the church should prepare for it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now, about your question related to the exact timing of the Lord’s return” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:1 a8f3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 Here, **the times and the seasons** is an idiom referring to a specific point in time or a time period. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. This phrase could refer to: (1) a specific point in time. Alternate translation: “the appointed time when Jesus returns” or “the fixed time when Jesus returns” (See [Acts 1:7](acts/01/07.md)) for this exact phrase referring to the same thing)). (2) a specific amount of time. Alternate translation: “how long it will take for the Lord Jesus to return” or “when the Lord Jesus will return” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 5:1 caue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐ χρείαν ἔχετε ὑμῖν γράφεσθαι 1 Here words are left out in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **{for us}** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -5:2 yvg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile perfectly well 0 This verse begins an extended list of contrasting similes that continues through [5:8](../05/08.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use equivalent comparisons or express these meanings plainly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +5:2 yvg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile 0 This verse begins an extended list of contrasting similes that continues through [5:8](../05/08.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use equivalent comparisons or express these meanings plainly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 5:2 dqgk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἀκριβῶς οἴδατε 1 The words **For**, **yourselves**, and **perfectly** emphasize how clearly the Thessalonian church should understand when and how the Lord’s Second Coming will happen. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “In fact, it is certain that you recognize accurately” or “You are certainly well aware of this fact” or “Indeed, you know precisely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 5:2 mcq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church has “no need that anything be written” to them about the timing and manner of the Lord’s Second Coming (See [5:1](../05/01.md)). Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “Certainly,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:2 tu9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἡμέρα Κυρίου 1 Here, **the day of the Lord** is an idiom that refers to the Old Testament concept of the time of God’s final judgment. The context of this passage makes it clear that **the day of the Lord** is synonymous with “the coming of the Lord” Jesus in [4:15](../04/15.md). (See also [Acts 2:20](../act/02/20.md); [1 Corinthians 5:5](../1co/05/05.md); [2 Thessalonians 2:2](../2th/02/02.md); [2 Peter 3:10](../2pe/03/10.md)). Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this idea. Alternate translation; “the time when the Lord Jesus returns again to earth” or “the time when the Lord Jesus will finally judge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -441,7 +446,7 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In 5:13 jq0o rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, διὰ τὸ ἔργον αὐτῶν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “and because of their work on your behalf, we also ask you to lovingly show them the utmost consideration” or “and since they work so hard for you, we also urge you to show them the highest honor out of love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:13 p6m4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ἀγάπῃ 1 Paul speaks as if the Thessalonian church is occupying space inside of **love**. He is describing how they should show honor to their leaders. If your readers would not understand what **in love** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Here, **in love** could refer to: (1) the means of love. Alternate translation: “by loving them” (2) the basis for love. Alternate translation: “on the basis of your love for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:13 rqs8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς 1 Here is the first of 17 final appeals in [5:13–26](../05/13.md) that the apostles give the Thessalonian church. **Be at peace** is an imperative, but here it could be an urgent request rather than a command. Use a natural way in your language to communicate an appeal or urgent request. Alternate translation: “We urge you to continue to live peacefully with your leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -5:14 lajk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany to regard them highly in love because of their work 0 Paul uses a repetitive series of imperative sentences in [5:14–22](../05/14) to urge the Thessalonian church to show practical love to one another. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone should do. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) +5:14 lajk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany 0 Paul uses a repetitive series of imperative sentences in [5:14–22](../05/14) to urge the Thessalonian church to show practical love to one another. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone should do. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) 5:14 tdxa rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases παρακαλοῦμεν δὲ ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, 1 This phrase signals the apostles’ final appeals to the Thessalonian church. Since there are 14 commands in this section [5:14–22](../05/14.md), you could use a marker from your language to indicate this final section. Alternate translation: “Finally, we urge you, fellow believers in Christ” See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:14 qadb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 Here the idiom **brothers** could refer to: (1) the whole Thessalonian church including the leaders. Alternate translation: “our fellow believers in Christ” (2) the leaders of the Thessalonian church. Alternate translation: “fellow leaders of Christ’s church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 5:14 g34k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πρὸς πάντας 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe the Thessalonian church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “toward all your fellow believers in Christ” or “with the whole Thessalonian church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -464,7 +469,7 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In 5:19 sv8r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes μὴ σβέννυτε 1 Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Continue to kindle” or “Be fervent in” or “Keep working along with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 5:20 iv1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε 1 Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Readily accept” or “Cherish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 5:20 rrza rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism προφητείας μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε 1 The two phrases in [5:19–20](../05/19.md) could refer to the same thing. Paul could be saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to correct how the Thessalonian church viewed prophecy. He means that the Holy Spirit is the source of true prophecy (See [2 Peter 1:21](2pet/01/21.md)), so they should not “quench the Spirit” by rejecting all prophecies. You could use a natural way in your language to emphasize this. Alternate translation: “Do not continue to despise prophetic messages from the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -5:21 ihzh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πάντα δοκιμάζετε; τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is beginning a general list of things that the Thessalonians should **Test** and **Hold fast** if they are **good**. (2) Paul is continuing to refer to the prophesies in the previous verse, and he wants the Thessalonians to **Test** those and **Hold fast** to the prophesies that are truly from God. +5:21 ihzh πάντα δοκιμάζετε; τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is beginning a general list of things that the Thessalonians should **Test** and **Hold fast** if they are **good**. (2) Paul is continuing to refer to the prophesies in the previous verse, and he wants the Thessalonians to **Test** those and **Hold fast** to the prophesies that are truly from God. 5:21 wx69 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πάντα δοκιμάζετε 1 Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians could make **all things** pass a test. This could mean: (1) they should examine everything they hear and do to make sure it conforms to what honors God. Alternate translation: “Carefully examine everything you hear and do” (2) they should examine and approve prophecies to determine whether or not they are genuinely from the Holy Spirit (See [2:4](../02/04.md) for a similar context)). Alternate translation: “examine and approve all prophecies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:21 sjh0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντα 1 Here, **all things** is an adjectival phrase. Depending on whether you decided this is a new list or a continuation of verse 20, this could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “everything you hear and do” (2) Alternate translation: “all prophesies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 5:21 n1jv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 Paul speaks of **good** things as if they were objects that someone could hold tightly in his hands. He means that the Thessalonian church should only believe and practice things that prove to be from the Holy Spirit. If your readers would not understand what it means to **hold fast to what {is} good** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Keep only the valid things” or “Retain what is from the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index fd82f42d2b..7414bbce45 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 1:4 cxwj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως ἧς παρακαλούμεθα αὐτοὶ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **comfort** or would not use both the noun **comfort** and the verb **comforted** together, you could express the same idea by using only the verb. Alternate translation: “in the same way in which we ourselves are comforted” or “just as we ourselves are comforted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) 1:4 eh7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns παρακαλούμεθα αὐτοὶ 1 Paul uses the word **ourselves** to emphasize that we, even though we are weak human beings, can comfort others as God comforted us. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “even we are comforted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1:4 hlnx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παρακαλούμεθα αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God comforts even us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1:5 nn5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὅτι καθὼς περισσεύει τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ἡμᾶς 1 Here Paul speaks of the **sufferings of Christ** as if they were objects that could increase and move toward him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a different metaphor or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “For just as people made Christ suffer, they are now making us suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1:5 nn5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὅτι καθὼς περισσεύει τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ἡμᾶς 1 Here Paul speaks of the **sufferings of Christ** as if they were objects that could increase and move toward him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a different metaphor or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “For just as people made Christ suffer, and they are now making us suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:5 tg9w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περισσεύει & ἡ παράκλησις ἡμῶν 2 Here Paul speaks of **comfort** as if it were an object that could increase in size. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a different metaphor or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God comforts us abundantly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:6 y9bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα 1 Here and through the first half of verse 21, the word **we** and other first-person pronouns refer to Paul and Timothy, but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1:6 bbff εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα 1 There is no strong contrast here. Rather, Paul continues to talk about suffering and comfort. If it is helpful in your language, you do not need to use a word here that indicates a contrast with what came before. Alternate translation: “If we are afflicted” @@ -48,15 +48,15 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 1:10 c2xx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς ὃν ἠλπίκαμεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we trust God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:11 q17d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν τῇ δεήσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **supplication**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by praying to God for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:11 xftq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The connecting words **so that** introduce a goal or purpose relationship. Paul presents the purpose of the Corinthians praying for him to be that many people will be thanking God. Use a connector in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1:11 h0u2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων & εὐχαριστηθῇ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that many faces may give thanks … to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1:11 h0u2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων & εὐχαριστηθῇ ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that many faces may give thanks on our behalf to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:11 oskx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων 1 Paul is using **faces** to represent people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the lips of many” or “from many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1:11 bmze rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ εἰς ἡμᾶς χάρισμα 1 This **gracious gift** is something that God will do for Paul and his companions in the future in answer to many people's prayers. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **gift**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because God will have graciously given us what we needed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:11 dptz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis διὰ πολλῶν 1 Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the ideas earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “through the prayers of many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1:12 kqv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἀνεστράφημεν 1 In these verses Paul uses the words **our**, **we**, and **ourselves** to refer to himself and Timothy and possibly others who serve with them. These words do not include the people to whom he is writing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1:12 r9p8 ἡ γὰρ καύχησις ἡμῶν αὕτη ἐστίν 1 The word **boasting** here is used in the positive sense of wanting to tell others your feelings of great satisfaction and joy in doing something well. Alternate translation: “This is something that we feel very good about” -1:12 c7mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὸ μαρτύριον τῆς συνειδήσεως ἡμῶν 1 Here, Paul speaks of his **conscience** as if it were a person who could testify. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation (Please note that this alternate translation does not need the comma after conscience.): “we know by our conscience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -1:12 hs5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ μαρτύριον τῆς συνειδήσεως ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **testimony** and **conscience**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “we know this within ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1:12 xxc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἀνεστράφημεν 1 The phrase **we conducted ourselves** means that Paul and his companions controlled their own actions. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this idea. Alternate translation: “we acted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +1:12 c7mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὸ μαρτύριον τῆς συνειδήσεως ἡμῶν 1 Here, Paul speaks of his **conscience** as if it were a person who could testify. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Please note that this alternate translation does not need the comma after **conscience**. Alternate translation: “we know by our conscience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1:12 hs5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ μαρτύριον τῆς συνειδήσεως ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **testimony** and **conscience**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Please note that these alternate translations do not need the comma after **conscience**. Alternate translation: “our hearts tell us it is true” or “we are sure of it within ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:12 xxc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἀνεστράφημεν 1 The phrase **we conducted ourselves** means that Paul and his companions controlled their own actions. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this idea. Alternate translation: “we acted” or “we comported ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1:12 c2z9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 Paul is using **the world** to represent people who live in the world, that is, people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “among everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1:12 nc7o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἁγιότητι καὶ εἰλικρινείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **holiness** and **sincerity**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “as people whom God empowers to obey him and to be honest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:12 c1bd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ σαρκικῇ 1 Here, **fleshly** represents what is natural and human as opposed to what is spiritual and godly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not according to natural human wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 1:13 h2f4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness γράφομεν 1 Here Paul may be referring to himself with the plural pronoun **we** to show that he is only part of a group. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could use the singular “I” here instead, as Paul did later in the verse. Alternate translation: “I write” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) 1:13 h21j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ γὰρ ἄλλα γράφομεν ὑμῖν, ἀλλ’ ἢ ἃ ἀναγινώσκετε ἢ καὶ ἐπιγινώσκετε 1 Paul is expressing a positive meaning here by using the two negative phrases, **no other … but**. If it would be helpful, you could use an equivalent expression in your language or you could express the plain positive meaning. Alternate translation: “For everything we write to you is straight talk” or “For what we write to you is just what you read and understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1:13 vtx8 ἕως τέλους 1 This could mean: (1) Paul hopes that the Corinthians will understand everything that he is trying to say to them. Alternate translation: “all of it” or “fully” (2) Paul hopes that the Corinthians will continue to understand what he is saying to them until Jesus returns. Alternate translation: “until the end” -1:14 ma5m καύχημα ὑμῶν 1 The word **boasting** here is used in the positive sense of wanting to tell others your feeling of great satisfaction and joy in something good. See how you translated this in verse 12. Alternate translation: “your source of joy” or "your delight" +1:14 ma5m καύχημα ὑμῶν 1 The word **boasting** here is used in the positive sense of wanting to tell others your feeling of great satisfaction and joy in something good. See how you translated this in verse 12. Alternate translation: “your source of joy” or "your source of pride" 1:14 p1pi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καθάπερ καὶ ὑμεῖς ἡμῶν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “just as you also are our boasting” or “just as you also are our reason to boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1:14 urdj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 2 This occurrence of **ours** includes the Corinthian believers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1:15 n5ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ταύτῃ τῇ πεποιθήσει 1 The word **this** refers to what Paul has just said in verses 13 and 14. Paul was confident that the Corinthians would understand him and that they would be proud of him (very pleased with him). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the reference clear. Alternate translation: “being confident that you were proud of me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -85,10 +85,10 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 1:17 y41z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ? 1 The words **Yes, yes** and **No, no** are both repeated for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “so that I would say both ‘yes’ and ‘no’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1:18 icwz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 The connecting words here could indicate: (1) a comparison. Paul may be comparing the faithfulness of God to his own commitment to speak truthfully to the Corinthian believers. Alternate translation: “and in the same way,” (2) a result. Paul may be saying that he is faithful in his speaking because he is following God's example to be faithful. Alternate translation: “so, because of that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1:18 qutd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the term **our word** to refer to any message that he gave to the Corinthians by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1:18 hmuj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ναὶ καὶ οὔ 1 Here, **“Yes” and “No”** represents the speech of a person who says contradictory things. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one thing and then its opposite” or "confusing"(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1:18 hmuj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ναὶ καὶ οὔ 1 Here, **“Yes” and “No”** represents the speech of a person who says contradictory things. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “out of both sides of our mouth” or “one thing and then its opposite” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1:19 jmcj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word translated **For** connects this verse to the one before it as an explanation. If the connection between this statement and the previous one is not clear, you may want to use a similar connecting word here. Alternate translation: “You see,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1:19 hd2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ & Υἱὸς 1 **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -1:19 aqzq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ ἐν ὑμῖν δι’ ἡμῶν κηρυχθείς, δι’ ἐμοῦ, καὶ Σιλουανοῦ, καὶ Τιμοθέου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom I and Silvanus and Timothy proclaimed among you,” If you use this alternate translation, delete the dash that follows it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1:19 aqzq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ ἐν ὑμῖν δι’ ἡμῶν κηρυχθείς, δι’ ἐμοῦ, καὶ Σιλουανοῦ, καὶ Τιμοθέου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you use this alternate translation, you should delete the dash that follows it. Alternate translation: “the one whom I and Silvanus and Timothy proclaimed among you,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:19 ql6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σιλουανοῦ 1 The word **Silvanus** is the name of the man who is called “Silas” in the book of Acts and who was a leader in the early church. You may want to use one spelling here and put the other spelling in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1:19 t98z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ναὶ καὶ οὒ, ἀλλὰ ναὶ ἐν αὐτῷ γέγονεν 1 Here, the phrase combining **“Yes” and “No”** represents a person who is unreliable. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated this in verse 18. Alternate translation: “wishy-washy, but, as we said, a rock” or “unreliable, but we consistently showed you that he is trustworthy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1:19 xmu6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἀλλὰ ναὶ ἐν αὐτῷ γέγονεν 1 Here, the subject of the verb **has been**, represented by **it**, could refer to: (1) the proclamation of Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. Alternate translation: “but our proclamation has been ‘Yes’ in him” (2) Jesus. In this case, **in him** would be translated as “in it,” referring to the proclamation. Alternate translation: “but he has been ‘Yes’ in it” or “but Jesus has been ‘Yes’ in our proclamation” (3) reality in general. Alternate translation: “but it has always been the case that there has been ‘Yes’ in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 1:24 kv47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **for** connects the following statement as a reason for the previous two statements. Use a natural form in your language for connecting this statement to the previous ones as the reason. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1:24 cih8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἑστήκατε 1 Here, **stand firm** means to be steady, resolute, or established. Alternate translation: “you are well established” or “you are strong and steady” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1:24 xf2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ & πίστει 1 Here, **in the faith** could mean: (1) “in regard to your faith.” In other words, the Corinthian believers are independent of Paul in regard to their faith. They are responsible only to God for what they believe and do. Alternate translation: “concerning your commitment to God” (2) “because of your faith.” In other words, the Corinthian believers continue to belong to God because of their faith, not because of Paul's authority. Alternate translation: “because you trust in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2:intro hy3h 0 # 2 Corinthians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. Interrupted travel plans (1:15–2:13)\n * The interruption and the reason for it (1:15–2:4)\n * The person who caused grief (2:5–11)\n * Travel to Troas and Macedonia (2:12–13)\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The fragrance of Christ (2:14–17)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The previous letter\n\nIn [2:3–4](../02/03.md), [9](../02/09.md), Paul refers to a letter that he had already written and sent to the Corinthians. While a few scholars think this letter is 1 Corinthians, most likely we do not have this previous letter. Paul acknowledges that this previous letter might have “grieved” them, but he wants them to know that he wrote the letter because of his love for them. In your translation, make sure that these verses refer to a letter that Paul previously wrote, not to 2 Corinthians.\n\n### “Grieving” others\n\nPaul refers to “sorrow,” “grief,” and “grieving” others multiple times in [2:1–8](../02/01.md). These words refer to how people who are close friends can “grieve” or hurt each other by what they say and do. These words do not refer to physically hurting someone. Rather, they refer to hurting someone emotionally. Paul acknowledges that his letter might have “grieved” them, and he also indicates that one of the Corinthians has “grieved” fellow believers. Consider a natural way to refer to one person hurting or injuring another person inside.\n\n### The person who caused grief\n\nIn [2:5–11](../02/05.md), Paul refers to a person who has caused grief. Almost certainly, he has one specific person in mind. Paul is not clear about what this person did to cause the grief. He or she may have committed a sexual sin or stolen money from the church or opposed Paul’s authority. Whatever the person did, Paul chooses not to be specific about the person or what he or she did. Perhaps this is because he wants the Corinthians to forgive and show love to this person now that he or she has been properly disciplined by the church. In your translation, use general words for both the person and what the person did.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Aroma and fragrance\n\nIn [2:14–16](../02/14.md), Paul identifies himself and those who serve with him as an “aroma” or “fragrance.” Paul could be thinking in general of smells and odors, or he could be referring to the smell from incense and sacrifices offered during a “triumphal procession” (see [2:14](../02/14.md)), or he could be referring to the smell from sacrifices offered at the temple. Whatever exact smells Paul has in mind, he is clear that he and his fellow workers are a smell that comes from Christ, and people react to it very differently: some think it is the smell of death, while others think it is the smell of life. Paul speaks in this way because smells spread throughout a whole area, and people have to react to them. Just like the spread of smells, he and his fellow workers spread the gospel throughout the world, and people have to respond to it. Further, just as some people like a smell and others hate it, so some people believe the gospel and receive life from God, while others reject the gospel and perish. If possible, preserve the “aroma” and “fragrance” language. If necessary, you could use a simile to express the idea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Paul’s use of pronouns\n\nIn [2:1–13](../02/01.md), Paul consistently uses the first person singular to refer to himself and the second person plural to refer to the Corinthians. The only exception is in [2:11](../02/11.md), where Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and the Corinthians. However, in [2:14–17](../02/14.md), Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and those preaching the gospel with him. In these verses, “we” does not include the Corinthians. It is unclear exactly whom Paul includes in “we”: it could be just he and Titus, or he and the group that works with him, or he and everyone else who preaches the gospel. Consider natural ways to represent these changes in reference throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Paul’s travel\n\nIn [2:12–13](../02/12.md), Paul describes some of his travels. Troas is a city on the west coast of what is now Turkey. Since Troas was a port city, most likely Paul sailed from there to Macedonia, which is the northern part of what is now Greece. Since Corinth is in southern Greece, Paul was not too far away from the Corinthians. Paul continues the description of what happened in Macedonia in [7:5–7](../07/05.md). Consider what information your readers need to know to understand Paul’s travels, and include what is necessary in your translation or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/troas]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/macedonia]]) +2:intro hy3h 0 # 2 Corinthians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. Interrupted travel plans (1:15–2:13)\n * The interruption and the reason for it (1:15–2:4)\n * The person who caused grief (2:5–11)\n * Travel to Troas and Macedonia (2:12–13)\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The fragrance of Christ (2:14–17)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The previous letter\n\nIn [2:3–4](../02/03.md), [9](../02/09.md), Paul refers to a letter that he had already written and sent to the Corinthians. While a few scholars think this letter is 1 Corinthians, most likely we do not have this previous letter. Paul acknowledges that this previous letter might have “grieved” them, but he wants them to know that he wrote the letter because of his love for them. In your translation, make sure that these verses refer to a letter that Paul previously wrote, not to 2 Corinthians.\n\n### “Grieving” others\n\nPaul refers to “sorrow,” “grief,” and “grieving” others multiple times in [2:1–8](../02/01.md). These words refer to how people who are close friends can “grieve” or hurt each other by what they say and do. These words do not refer to physically hurting someone. Rather, they refer to hurting someone emotionally. Paul acknowledges that his letter might have “grieved” them, and he also indicates that one of the Corinthians has “grieved” fellow believers. Consider a natural way to refer to one person hurting or injuring another person inside.\n\n### The person who caused grief\n\nIn [2:5–11](../02/05.md), Paul refers to a person who has caused grief. Almost certainly, he has one specific person in mind. Paul is not clear about what this person did to cause the grief. He or she may have committed a sexual sin or stolen money from the church or opposed Paul’s authority. Whatever the person did, Paul chooses not to be specific about the person or what he or she did. Perhaps this is because he wants the Corinthians to forgive and show love to this person now that he or she has been properly disciplined by the church. In your translation, use general words for both the person and what the person did.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Aroma and fragrance\n\nIn [2:14–16](../02/14.md), Paul identifies himself and those who serve with him as an “aroma” or “fragrance.” Paul could be thinking in general of smells and odors, or he could be referring to the smell from incense and sacrifices offered during a “triumphal procession” (see [2:14](../02/14.md)), or he could be referring to the smell from sacrifices offered at the temple. Whatever exact smells Paul has in mind, he is clear that he and his fellow workers are a smell that comes from Christ, and people react to it very differently: some think it is the smell of death, while others think it is the smell of life. Paul speaks in this way because smells spread throughout a whole area, and people have to react to them. Just as smells spread, he and his fellow workers spread the gospel throughout the world, and people have to respond to it. Further, just as some people like a smell and others hate it, so some people believe the gospel and receive life from God, while others reject the gospel and perish. If possible, preserve the “aroma” and “fragrance” language. If necessary, you could use a simile to express the idea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Paul’s use of pronouns\n\nIn [2:1–13](../02/01.md), Paul consistently uses the first person singular to refer to himself and the second person plural to refer to the Corinthians. The only exception is in [2:11](../02/11.md), where Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and the Corinthians. However, in [2:14–17](../02/14.md), Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and those preaching the gospel with him. In these verses, “we” does not include the Corinthians. It is unclear exactly whom Paul includes in “we”: it could be just he and Titus, or he and the group that works with him, or he and everyone else who preaches the gospel. Consider natural ways to represent these changes in reference throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Paul’s travel\n\nIn [2:12–13](../02/12.md), Paul describes some of his travels. Troas is a city on the west coast of what is now Turkey. Since Troas was a port city, most likely Paul sailed from there to Macedonia, which is the northern part of what is now Greece. Since Corinth is in southern Greece, Paul was not too far away from the Corinthians. Paul continues the description of what happened in Macedonia in [7:5–7](../07/05.md). Consider what information your readers need to know to understand Paul’s travels, and include what is necessary in your translation or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/troas]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/macedonia]]) 2:1 wh9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said in [1:23](../01/23.md) about the reason why he did not visit Corinth, which was to spare them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Here is why I have not come to Corinth:” or “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 2:1 wpd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐμαυτῷ τοῦτο τὸ μὴ 1 Here, the word **this** refers ahead to what Paul is about to say: **not to come to you again in sorrow**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **this** refers to explicit, or you could rephrase the sentence so that you do not use **this**. Alternate translation: “for myself what follows: not” or “for myself not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2:1 yz5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐμαυτῷ 1 Here the phrase **for myself** indicates that Paul made this choice because of reasons he thought about. In other words, he was not forced to make this choice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that someone made their own choice or decision. Alternate translation: “on my own” or “in my own mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 2:2 x2vr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom I have grieved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2:3 kxu2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔγραψα 1 Here Paul refers to a letter he had already written to the Corinthians. Most likely, he wrote this letter sometime between when he wrote 1 Corinthians and 2 Corinthians, but we do not have the letter, so we do not know for sure. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that Paul is referring to a letter that he already sent to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my last letter” or “I sent you the previous letter, which that said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:3 e7c4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο αὐτὸ 1 Here, the phrase **this same thing** refers to what Paul wrote in the previous letter. He could be referring to: (1) what he just wrote in [2:1–2](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “the same thing I am now writing” (2) the contents of the previous letter in general. Alternate translation: “those things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -2:3 abty rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἐλθὼν 1 Here, the phrase **having come** refers to something that an event that is still in the future for Paul but that would happen at the same as **I might not have sorrow**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that happens at the same time as another event in the future. Alternate translation: “whenever I came” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) +2:3 abty rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἐλθὼν 1 Here, the phrase **having come** refers to an event that is still in the future for Paul but that would happen at the same time as **I might not have sorrow**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that happens at the same time as another event in the future. Alternate translation: “whenever I came” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) 2:3 v87i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μὴ & λύπην σχῶ ἀφ’ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sorrow**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “I might not become sorrowful because of” or “I might not be sad because of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:3 owzn ἀφ’ ὧν ἔδει με χαίρειν 1 Here, this clause could indicate that **it is necessary** for: (1) Paul to **rejoice** in the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “from those in which it is necessary for me to rejoice” (2) the Corinthians to give “joy” to Paul. Alternate translation: “from those for whom it is necessary to give me joy” 2:3 p4q2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result πεποιθὼς 1 Here, the phrase **having confidence** introduces a reason why Paul **wrote** the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “because I had confidence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -229,12 +229,12 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 2:16 ud2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον & ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν 1 Here Paul uses the words **from** and **to** with the same word. He could be using this form because: (1) **from** indicates the source of the **aroma**, and **to** indicates the effects of the **aroma**. Alternate translation: “that smells like death and leads to death … that smells like life and leads to life” or “of death causing death … of life causing life” (2) **from** and **to** together emphasize that the **aroma** is characterized completely by either **death** or **life**. Alternate translation: “of death … of life” or “characterized completely by death … characterized completely by life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:16 yau5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον & ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **death** and **life**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “live” or adjectives such as “dead” and “alive.” Make sure your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note. Alternate translation: “that comes from something dying and that leads to people dying … that comes from something living and leads to people living” or “that smells like something dead … that smells like something alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:16 cdr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns πρὸς ταῦτα 1 Here, the phrase **these things** refers back to what those who proclaim the good news must do, things that Paul has outlined in [2:14–16](../02/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to what **these things** refers. Alternate translation: “to do what I have said” or “to preach the gospel like this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -2:16 be6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πρὸς ταῦτα τίς ἱκανός? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question could imply that the answer is that: (1) no one is **sufficient**. Alternate translation: “for these things, nobody is sufficient!” (2) Paul and his fellow workers are **sufficient**. Alternate translation: “for these things, we are indeed sufficient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -2:17 h7y1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) a basis or proof for why he and his fellow workers are not “sufficient,” as the previous question implied (see [2:16](../02/16.md)). Alternate translation: “You can tell that we are not sufficient because” (2) an answer to the previous question that indicates that Paul and his fellow workers are “sufficient.” Alternate translation: “But we are sufficient, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +2:16 be6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πρὸς ταῦτα τίς ἱκανός? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question could imply that the answer is that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers are **sufficient** since God works through them. Alternate translation: “for these things, we are indeed sufficient” (2) no one is **sufficient**. Alternate translation: “for these things, nobody is sufficient!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +2:17 h7y1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) an explanation of the implied answer to the previous question, which is that Paul and his fellow workers are “sufficient” since God works through them. Alternate translation: “But we are sufficient, because” (2) an explanation of why Paul and his fellow workers are like an aroma of life or death (see [2:16](../02/16.md)). Alternate translation: “We are an aroma of life or death because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2:17 pmpz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐσμεν & λαλοῦμεν 1 Here, just as in [2:14–15](../02/14.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach are … we speak” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am … I speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -2:17 a5sa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the words” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2:17 u7ui rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ πολλοὶ 1 Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to refer **many** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 2:17 yf8u rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown καπηλεύοντες 1 Here, the word **peddling** refers to the practice of selling goods that one has. The word implies that the person who is **peddling** is trying to make as much profit as they can, whether by honest or deceitful means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to selling something for as much money as possible. Alternate translation: “trading in” or “selling off” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +2:17 a5sa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the words” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2:17 ohh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the word** that could be: (1) from **God**. Alternate translation: “the word from God” (2) about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:17 u4iy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ ὡς -1 Here Paul uses **but as** to introduce a contrast with **the many** who “peddle” God’s word. Paul repeats **but as** to continue and emphasize this contrast, not to contrast **sincerity** and **from God**. If the repetition of **but as** would be confusing, you could use **but as** once and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “but instead as … and even more as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 2:17 x86y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξ εἰλικρινείας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sincerity**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sincere.” Alternate translation: “those who are sincere” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:4 y72k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρὸς τὸν Θεόν 1 Here, the phrase **toward God** could indicate that the **confidence** is: (1) before or in the presence of **God**. In other words, Paul has **confidence** that God approves of him and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “with regard to God” (2) in **God**. In other words, Paul has **confidence** that God will do what he has promised. Alternate translation: “in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:5 knf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast οὐχ 1 Here, the word **Not** introduces a contrast with what Paul said in the previous verse about **confidence** (see [3:4](../03/04.md)). He wishes to clarify that the **confidence** is not based on human abilities but on **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But it is not” or “However, it is not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 3:5 i7nt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἑαυτῶν & ἐσμεν & ἑαυτῶν & ἡμῶν 1 Here, just as in [3:1–4](../03/01.md), the words **we**, **ourselves**, and **our** do not include the Corinthians. They could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel are … ourselves … ourselves … our” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am … myself … myself … my” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -3:5 qye9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν ἱκανοί & ἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul does not state what they are not **sufficient** to do. He implies that it is serving God by preaching the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “sufficient from ourselves to preach the gospel … our sufficiency for this task” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:5 qye9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν ἱκανοί & ἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul does not state what they are not **sufficient** to do. He implies that it is serving God by preaching the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “sufficient in preaching the gospel from ourselves … our sufficiency for this task” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:5 e5e7 ἑαυτῶν & λογίσασθαί 1 Here, the phrase **to consider** introduces an explanation or elaboration of what **sufficient from ourselves** means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or elaboration. Alternate translation: “ourselves, that is, we do not consider” or “ourselves, so that we consider” 3:5 tws9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τι 1 Here, the word **anything** refers to whatever they do to serve God well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “anything we do preach the gospel” or “whatever we do well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:5 wi1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sufficiency**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sufficient.” Alternate translation: “God makes us sufficient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:9 ufq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως & ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of ministering. In this case, the word refers to how people administered the two covenants. Alternate translation: “the service of this condemnation … the service of this righteousness” or “the act of ministering that leads to this condemnation … the act of ministering that leads to this righteousness” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to a covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of this condemnation … the system of this righteousness” or “the law that leads to condemnation … the principle that leads to righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:9 k779 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **condemnation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused this condemnation” or “the ministry that ended in this condemnation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:9 tcxw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως, δόξα 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **condemnation** and **glory**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused people to be condemned was great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -3:9 if33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ 1 Here, the phrase **much more** marks this clause as an exclamation, not a question. Paul uses this exclamation to emphatically contrast the two ministries. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally contrasts the two ministries. Alternate translation: “then certainly much more the ministry of this righteousness abounds in glory.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +3:9 if33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ 1 Here, Paul uses an exclamation to emphatically compare the two ministries and to show that **the ministry of this righteousness** has **much more glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally compares the **glory** of the two ministries. Alternate translation: “then certainly the ministry of this righteousness abounds in much more glory!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 3:9 egmy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused this righteousness” or “the ministry that ended in this righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:9 e5zz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ. 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **righteousness** and **glory**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that makes people righteous is even more great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:10 q8bg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information that supports what he said about **glory** in [3:7–9](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “And in fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:11 zwb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ καταργούμενον 1 Here, the phrase **fading away** translates the same word that Paul used in [3:7](../03/07.md) to refer to how the glory was “fading” from Moses’ face. Paul means that just like the glory on Moses’ face was temporary, so the old covenant that God made through Moses was also temporary. See how you translated this idea in [3:7](../03/07.md) and use similar language if possible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a simile. Alternate translation: “what is temporary” or “what is fading, like the glory on Moses’ face,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:11 hm9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ καταργούμενον & τὸ μένον 1 Here, the phrase **{what} is fading away** refers to the old covenant, while the phrase **{what} remains** refers to the new covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what these phrases refer to. Alternate translation: “the old covenant that is fading away … the new covenant that remains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:11 wtht rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ δόξης & ἐν δόξῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great” or an adverb such as “gloriously.” Alternate translation: “was great … is great” or “came gloriously … will come gloriously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -3:11 wrf4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations πολλῷ μᾶλλον τὸ μένον ἐν δόξῃ 1 Here, the phrase **much more** marks this clause as an exclamation, not a question. Paul uses this exclamation to emphatically contrast the two covenants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally contrasts the two covenants. Alternate translation: “then certainly much more what remains will come with glory.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +3:11 wrf4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations πολλῷ μᾶλλον τὸ μένον ἐν δόξῃ 1 Here, Paul uses an exclamation to emphatically compare the two covenants and to show that the covenant that **remains** has much more **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally compares the **glory** of the two covenants. Alternate translation: “then certainly what remains will come with much more glory!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 3:12 tnc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what Paul has already said, especially what he has said about the ministry of “glory” in [3:4–11](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from a previous section. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “Because of this ministry of glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:12 ib35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers **act with much boldness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:12 j76k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔχοντες & τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “hope” or an adjective such as “hopeful.” Alternate translation: “being hopeful in such a way” or “hoping in that way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -355,9 +355,9 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 3:14 csl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **their** refers to “the sons of Israel” that Paul mentioned in [3:13](../03/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun **their** refers. Alternate translation: “the minds of the sons of Israel” or “the minds of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 3:14 khkq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If it is possible, avoid stating who did the “hardening,” since Paul is emphasizing the fact that their minds were “hard,” not who did the “hardening.” If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) the Israelites did it to themselves. Alternate translation: “they hardened their minds” or “their minds became hard” (2) God did it to them. Alternate translation: “God hardened their minds” (3) Satan did it to them. Alternate translation: “Satan hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:14 zvf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if people’s **minds** were a soft substance that could be **hardened**, becoming resistant to change. He speaks in this way to indicate that their **minds** could not know or understand what was happening, unlike a soft substance that would change when something impacts it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not realize what was true” or “they could not think properly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:14 tzbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a further explanation of what Paul has said about how **their minds were hardened**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “since” or "because" (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +3:14 tzbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a further explanation of what Paul has said about how **their minds were hardened**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:14 w68p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 Here Paul speaks as if a **veil** kept people from understanding the **old covenant** when it is “read,” and this veil is not **lifted**. He speaks in this way to identify the inability of people to understand the **old covenant** with how Moses’ kept the Israelites from looking at his face with a **veil**. Just as the **veil** kept them from seeing the glory on his face, so a **veil** keeps people from understanding **the reading of the old covenant**. Since Paul uses this figure of speech to connect what he is saying with what he has said about Moses, you should preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is a like a veil that remains at the reading of the old covenant, not being lifted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:14 wcbv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 Here, the phrase **not being lifted** could: (1) explain how the veil **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains at the reading of the old covenant, and it is not lifted” (2) go with **remains** and explain what **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains, not having been lifted at the reading of the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +3:14 wcbv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 Here, the phrase **not being lifted** could: (1) explain why the veil **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains at the reading of the old covenant, since it is not lifted” (2) describe the state that **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil is still not lifted at the reading of the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 3:14 wymg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα 1 Here, the phrase **same veil** could refer to: (1) the veil that Moses wore (see [3:13](../03/13.md)). Alternate translation: “the veil that Moses wore” (2) the veil that **hardened** their **minds**. Alternate translation: “the veil that hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:14 gg2d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer to a person **reading** the **old covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “when the old covenant is read” or “when they read the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:14 orvo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης 1 Here, the phrase **old covenant** refers to the words that contain or describe **the old covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer directly to these words. Alternate translation: “of the message about the old covenant” or “of the words that describe the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:3 e5yu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις 1 Christians disagree over whether God causes people to perish or whether people cause themselves to perish. The word that Paul uses here intentionally does not include the person who causes the perishing. If possible, your translation also should avoid stating who causes the perishing. See how you translated the similar phrase in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “the ones on the path to destruction” or “the ones who are not being saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 4:4 m71d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 Here, the phrase **the god of this age** refers to Satan, or the devil. Paul describes him in this way because God has allowed Satan to have some control or power in **this age**, which refers to the world as it is right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the god of this age, Satan,” or “the devil, who rules over this age” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:4 ptb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **god** who rules over or controls **this age**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the god who controls this age” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -4:4 r6pz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐτύφλωσεν τὰ νοήματα τῶν ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ μὴ αὐγάσαι τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul speaks as if **minds** were eyes that could be **blinded** or that could see **light**. If **minds** are **blinded**, they cannot understand something. If **minds** can see **light**, they can understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has made the minds of the unbelievers to be like blind eyes, so that they do not understand the gospel of the glory of Christ, who is the image of God.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:4 r6pz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐτύφλωσεν τὰ νοήματα τῶν ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ μὴ αὐγάσαι τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν εἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul speaks as if **minds** were eyes that could be **blinded** or that could see **light**. If **minds** are **blinded**, they cannot understand something. If **minds** can see **light**, they can understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has made the minds of the unbelievers to be like blind eyes, so that they do not understand the gospel of the glory of Christ, who is the image of God.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:4 squ9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ 1 Here, the phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the result of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, with the result that” (2) the purpose of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:4 j1vz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here the author uses the possessive form multiple times. What he means is that the **light** either is or comes from the **gospel**, and the **gospel** is about the **glory of Christ**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **Christ** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. Alternate translation: “the light, which is the gospel about the glorious Christ” or “the light that comes from the gospel concerning how glorious Christ is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:4 hj21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “of the great Christ” or “Christ, the glorious one,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:16 u6e5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Here, the word **So** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what Paul has said, probably focusing on what he said in [4:7–15](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion from a previous section. Alternate translation: “So then,” or “Because of all that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:16 p7pv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν 1 See you how translated the word **discouraged** in [4:1](../04/01.md). It could refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:16 cb92 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ καὶ 1 Here Paul is speaking as if **our outer man is decaying** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by indicating that **our outer man** is indeed **decaying**. Alternate translation: “despite the fact that” or “although” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -4:16 hhv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἔξω ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος 1 Here, the phrase **outer man** could refer to: (1) the part of the person that others can observe and see. Alternate translation: “our observable part” or “our external part” (2) the physical part of the person. Alternate translation: “our body” or “our physical part” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:16 hhv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἔξω ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος 1 Here, the phrase **outer man** refers to the part of the person that others can observe and see. It includes the physical part of the person, but it is not only a person’s body. Alternate translation: “our observable self” or “our external part” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:16 pnms rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος & ἔσω 1 Although the word **man** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “person … inner person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 4:16 jcra ἄνθρωπος διαφθείρεται & ἔσω & ἀνακαινοῦται 1 Here the author is speaking of **outer** and **inner** men in general, not of one particular **man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to men or people in general. Alternate translation: “men are decaying … inner men are being renewed” or “persons are decaying … outer persons are being renewed”\n 4:16 vliu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διαφθείρεται 1 Here Paul speaks as if the **outer man** were a dead thing that was **decaying**. He speaks in this way to indicate that the **outer man** is in the process of dying or passing away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is dying” or “is passing away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 4:18 f97x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα 1 This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we are watching the things not being seen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 4:18 hbrg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why **We** are **watching** the things that are not seen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “We do that because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:18 kx7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ γὰρ βλεπόμενα & τὰ δὲ μὴ βλεπόμενα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could refer to “we” or to people in general. Alternate translation: “For the things that people see … but the things that people do not see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:intro s14p 0 # 2 Corinthians 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Confidence in the resurrection (5:1–10)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Resurrection bodies\n\nIn [5:1–5](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about new bodies that believers will receive when Jesus comes back. Right now, he and his fellow workers groan while they have their current bodies. That is because these bodies are weak and will eventually die. However, Paul and his fellow workers do not want to just get rid of their bodies. Rather, they are looking forward expectantly to receiving new bodies that will not die. Paul expresses these ideas by using building and clothing language. See the sections below that address how this language functions. Make sure that your translation clearly contrasts old bodies with new bodies and does not suggest that Paul just wants to get rid of his body.\n\n### The intermediate state?\n\nIn [5:6–9](../05/06.md), Paul speaks about being away from the body and with the Lord. As the previous section has illustrated, Paul’s goal is to have a new body, not to be “away from the body.” So, what is he referring to here? There are three primary options. First, many Christians believe that Paul is talking about the time period between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back. During this time period, the believer does not have a body but is with Jesus in heaven. Then, when Jesus comes back, the believer receives a new body. Second, some Christians believe that Paul is talking about how believers receive new bodies immediately after they die. In other words, the next thing that a believer experiences after he or she dies is Jesus’ return. In this case, there is no time period between death and resurrection. Third, some Christians believe that Paul is speaking about how believers receive a temporary body for the time they are in heaven with Jesus before he comes back. If possible, your translation should allow for all three of these interpretations. Make sure that you include at least option one, since this is the option that most Christians believe.\n\n### New creation\n\nIn [5:17](../05/17.md), Paul speaks about how being “in Christ” leads to “new creation,” with “old things” passing away and “new things” coming. Paul uses very general language, and the “new creation” could identify the person who is “in Christ” or everything that God is making “new.” If it is about people primarily, Paul’s point is that they are made “new” when they are in Christ. If it is about the world in general, Paul’s point is that God makes the world “new” in Christ, and people experience this “new creation” when they too are in Christ. Since Paul’s language is so general, it is best to express the idea in such a way that both of these interpretations are possible. If you must choose one, most interpreters think that Paul is focusing on people here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/creation]])\n\n### Reconciliation\n\nIn [5:18–20](../05/18.md), Paul speaks about how God reconciles people to himself and gives the ministry of reconciliation to Paul and his fellow workers. The word “reconcile” refers to how someone restores a relationship with someone else so that they can be together again. In other words, when someone does something that breaks or hurts a relationship, “reconciliation” heals the broken relationship. Consider how you might naturally express this idea in your language. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Bodies as homes\n\nIn [5:1–9](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about bodies as if they were homes. He identifies current earthly bodies as “tents,” which indicates that they do not last. He identifies resurrection bodies as “buildings” that God makes. Paul uses the language of “home” to indicate that people belong in bodies and not without bodies. However, he does seem to think that people can be without bodies for a period of time, just as people can leave their homes for a period of time (see the above discussion of the “intermediate state”). Further, he contrasts “tent” homes with “building” homes to indicate that the “building” is the home (that is, body) that will last forever and which believers should long for. If possible, preserve the “home” language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/house]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/tent]])\n\n### Bodies as clothing\n\nIn [5:2–4](../05/02.md), Paul mixes "clothing" language in with his "home" language. The clothes are bodies, and Paul again uses this language to indicate that people belong in bodies (clothed), not without bodies (naked or unclothed). He does not use clothing language to show that bodies are an unimportant part of who people are. If possible, preserve the clothing language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. However, if how Paul mixes together home and clothing language would be confusing, you may need to use only the home language and express the clothing language plainly or as home language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/clothed]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and his fellow workers, or just on himself (although this is less likely). However, he does not necessarily mean that what he says is not true of the Corinthians or of believers in general. Consider how you can communicate the focus on Paul and his fellow workers without totally excluding the Corinthians. In every case where Paul may be using the first person plural in a way different than this, a note will explain the options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Singular nouns in general statements\n\nIn [5:1–10](../05/01.md), Paul consistently refers to “body,” “building,” “tent,” and “home” in singular form. He does this because the singular form was a natural way to refer to these things in general. Throughout this section, the UST models how to express the ideas in plural form, since this is more natural for general statements in English. Consider how your language might naturally express a general statement about “bodies.”\n\n### Translating [5:21](../05/21.md)\n\nPaul speaks in a very compressed way in this verse, and Christians disagree about what exactly he means. What is relatively clear is that Paul has in mind what some people call an “interchange” between Christ and believers. Christ, who is “righteous,” is somehow identified with “sin,” and believers, who are “sinners,” are somehow identified with “righteousness.” The “in him” at the end of the verse indicates that this interchange occurs in union with Christ. For details about what it could mean for Christ to be “made sin” and for believers to “become the righteousness of God,” see the notes on this verse. If possible, however, your translation should be as general as Paul’s sentence. This means that you should express the general idea of interchange and allow for many of the possible interpretations listed in the notes. +5:intro s14p 0 # 2 Corinthians 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Confidence in the resurrection (5:1–10)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Resurrection bodies\n\nIn [5:1–5](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about new bodies that believers will receive when Jesus comes back. Right now, he and his fellow workers groan while they have their current bodies. That is because these bodies are weak and will eventually die. However, Paul and his fellow workers do not want to just get rid of their bodies. Rather, they are looking forward expectantly to receiving new bodies that will not die. Paul expresses these ideas by using building and clothing language. See the sections below that address how this language functions. Make sure that your translation clearly contrasts old bodies with new bodies and does not suggest that Paul just wants to get rid of his body.\n\n### The intermediate state?\n\nIn [5:6–9](../05/06.md), Paul speaks about being away from the body and with the Lord. As the previous section has illustrated, Paul’s goal is to have a new body, not to be “away from the body.” So, what is he referring to here? There are three primary options. First, many Christians believe that Paul is talking about the time period between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back. During this time period, the believer does not have a body but is with Jesus in heaven. Then, when Jesus comes back, the believer receives a new body. Second, some Christians believe that Paul is talking about how believers receive new bodies immediately after they die. In other words, the next thing that a believer experiences after he or she dies is Jesus’ return. In this case, there is no time period between death and resurrection. Third, some Christians believe that Paul is speaking about how believers receive a temporary body for the time they are in heaven with Jesus before he comes back. If possible, your translation should allow for all three of these interpretations. Make sure that you include at least option one, since this is the option that most Christians believe.\n\n### New creation\n\nIn [5:17](../05/17.md), Paul speaks about how being “in Christ” leads to “new creation,” with “old things” passing away and “new things” coming. Paul uses very general language, and the “new creation” could identify the person who is “in Christ” or everything that God is making “new.” If it is about people primarily, Paul’s point is that they are made “new” when they are in Christ. If it is about the world in general, Paul’s point is that God makes the world “new” in Christ, and people experience this “new creation” when they too are in Christ. Since Paul’s language is so general, it is best to express the idea in such a way that both of these interpretations are possible. If you must choose one, most interpreters think that Paul is focusing on people here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/creation]])\n\n### Reconciliation\n\nIn [5:18–20](../05/18.md), Paul speaks about how God reconciles people to himself and gives the ministry of reconciliation to Paul and his fellow workers. The word “reconcile” refers to how someone restores a relationship with someone else so that they can be together again. In other words, when someone does something that breaks or hurts a relationship, “reconciliation” heals the broken relationship. Consider how you might naturally express this idea in your language. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Bodies as homes\n\nIn [5:1–9](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about bodies as if they were homes. He identifies current earthly bodies as “tents,” which indicates that they do not last. He identifies resurrection bodies as “buildings” that God makes. Paul uses the language of “home” to indicate that people belong in bodies and not without bodies. However, he does seem to think that people can be without bodies for a period of time, just as people can leave their homes for a period of time (see the above discussion of the “intermediate state”). Further, he contrasts “tent” homes with “building” homes to indicate that the “building” is the home (that is, body) that will last forever and which believers should long for. If possible, preserve the “home” language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/house]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/tent]])\n\n### Bodies as clothing\n\nIn [5:2–4](../05/02.md), Paul mixes "clothing" language in with his "home" language. The clothes are bodies, and Paul again uses this language to indicate that people belong in bodies (clothed), not without bodies (naked or unclothed). He does not use clothing language to show that bodies are an unimportant part of who people are. If possible, preserve the clothing language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. However, if how Paul mixes together home and clothing language would be confusing, you may need to use only the home language and express the clothing language plainly or as home language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/clothed]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and his fellow workers, or just on himself (although this is less likely). However, he does not necessarily mean that what he says is not true of the Corinthians or of believers in general. Consider how you can communicate the focus on Paul and his fellow workers without totally excluding the Corinthians. In every case where Paul may be using the first person plural in a way different than this, a note will explain the options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Singular nouns in general statements\n\nIn [5:1–10](../05/01.md), Paul consistently refers to “body,” “building,” “tent,” and “home” in singular form. He does this because the singular form was a natural way to refer to these things in general. Throughout this section, the UST models how to express the ideas in plural form, since this is more natural for general statements in English. Consider how your language might naturally express a general statement about “bodies.”\n\n### Translating [5:21](../05/21.md)\n\nPaul speaks in a very compressed way in this verse, and Christians disagree about what exactly he means. What is relatively clear is that Paul has in mind what some people call an “exchange” between Christ and believers. Christ, who is “righteous,” is somehow identified with “sin,” and believers, who are “sinners,” are somehow identified with “righteousness.” The “in him” at the end of the verse indicates that this interchange occurs in union with Christ. For details about what it could mean for Christ to be “made sin” and for believers to “become the righteousness of God,” see the notes on this verse. If possible, however, your translation should be as general as Paul’s sentence. This means that you should express the general idea of “exchange” and allow for many of the possible interpretations listed in the notes. 5:1 p7b7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) an explanation of what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “In fact,” (2) an example or illustration of what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “For example,” (3) a basis for what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:1 v03z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive οἴδαμεν & ἡμῶν & ἔχομεν 1 Here and throughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. See the chapter introduction for more information on how to translate these words. Here, the words **we** and **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and his fellow workers. Paul is focusing on himself and his fellow workers, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel … our … we have” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us know … our … we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 5:1 la71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν 1 Here, the word **if** could introduce: (1) something that Paul thinks will definitely happen, but he is not sure when. Alternate translation: “whenever” (2) something that Paul thinks might happen. Alternate translation: “even if” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) @@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:8 iq0j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces again what Paul started speaking about in [5:16(../05/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that resumes an earlier idea or thought. Alternate translation: “Again,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:8 npio rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **and** could introduce: (1) additional information. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a contrast with how they are **confident**. Alternate translation: “but” (3) what it is that they are **confident** about. Alternate translation: “enough that we” See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:8 a6au εὐδοκοῦμεν, μᾶλλον 1 Alternate translation: “would prefer” -5:8 i3m3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος καὶ ἐνδημῆσαι πρὸς τὸν Κύριον 1 Here Paul continues to refer to the **body** as if it were a building in which a person could be **at home**. Express the idea as you did in [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: “not to live in the body as if it were a home and to be present with the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +5:8 i3m3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος καὶ ἐνδημῆσαι πρὸς τὸν Κύριον 1 Here Paul continues to refer to the **body** as if it were a building in which a person could be **at home**. Express the idea as you did in [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: “not to live in the body as if it were a home but to be present with the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 5:8 bca2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος 1 Here, the word **body** refers to the body that people have before they die. The phrase **be away from the body** could refer to: (1) a temporary situation between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back in which the believer does not have a body but is still **with the Lord**. Alternate translation: “to be without a body for now” (2) the eternal situation of believers, in which they either have no bodies or have new bodies. Alternate translation: “to be away from this body forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:9 owmc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ καὶ 1 Here, the phrase **And therefore** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what Paul has already said, particularly in [5:6–8](../05/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “And so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:9 ml5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες 1 Here Paul could be referring to how people are **at home** or **away** from: (1) the Lord. Alternate translation: “whether being at home with the Lord or being away from him” (2) this body. Alternate translation: “whether being at home in this body or being away from it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 5:11 qm34 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνθρώπους πείθομεν 1 Here Paul could be implying that he “persuades” people: (1) to know **the fear of the Lord** as he and those with him do. Alternate translation: “we persuade men also to know the fear of the Lord” (2) to realize that he and those with him are people who know **the fear of the Lord** and are thus trustworthy. Alternate translation: “we persuade men that we are those who fear the Lord” or “we persuade men that we are trustworthy” (3) to accept the gospel. Alternate translation: “we persuade men to believe the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:11 b7dd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with how they **persuade men**. In contrast with that, they do not need to persuade God, since they are already **clearly known** by him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this relationship clear. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 5:11 v11v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Θεῷ & πεφανερώμεθα & πεφανερῶσθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God knows us clearly … that you know us clearly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:11 qb7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πεφανερώμεθα & ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσιν ὑμῶν πεφανερῶσθαι 1 Here Paul does not state what it is about them that is **clearly known**. Paul implies that **God** knows that Paul and his coworkers are faithful to God and preach the good news properly. Paul wants the Corinthians to recognize this also. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we are clearly known to be faithful … to be clearly known in your consciences as faithful” or “we are clearly known to preach the truth … to be clearly known in your consciences as one preaching the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:11 qb7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πεφανερώμεθα & ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσιν ὑμῶν πεφανερῶσθαι 1 Here Paul does not state what it is about them that is **clearly known**. He implies that **God** knows that Paul and his coworkers are faithful to God and preach the good news properly. Paul wants the Corinthians to recognize this also. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we are clearly known to be faithful … to be clearly known in your consciences as faithful” or “we are clearly known to preach the truth … to be clearly known in your consciences as one preaching the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:12 r7sg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐ πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνομεν ὑμῖν, ἀλλὰ ἀφορμὴν διδόντες ὑμῖν καυχήματος ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, ἵνα ἔχητε πρὸς τοὺς ἐν προσώπῳ καυχωμένους, καὶ μὴ ἐν καρδίᾳ 1 If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the order of the elements here. Alternate translation: “We are giving you an opportunity of boasting on our behalf, so that you may have an answer for the ones boasting in appearance and not in heart. It is not that we are again commending ourselves to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 5:12 ufwe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλιν 1 Here, the word **again** implies that Paul and those with him had already “commended themselves” at some point in the past. Most likely, this happened when they first met the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. See how you translated the similar form in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “once more” or “again, like we did at first,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:12 c134 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἀφορμὴν & καυχήματος 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an **opportunity** that is for **boasting**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “an opportunity for boasting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -681,7 +681,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:2 sa94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ, νῦν -1 Here, the words **Behold** and **Look** draw the attention of the audience and ask them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with words or phrases that ask the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statements that follow. Alternate translation: “Pay attention! Now … Pay attention! Now” or “Listen, now … Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 6:2 j4k4 καιρὸς εὐπρόσδεκτος & ἡμέρα σωτηρίας 1 Here, the phrases **a day of salvation** and **a favorable time** repeat the words from the quotation exactly, except Paul uses a word that emphasizes that the **time** is good (**favorable**) instead of just being appropriate (**acceptable**). Use the form that you used in the quotation, although, if possible, use a word for a good **time** instead of just an **acceptable time**. Alternate translation: “is a time that God considers good … is a time of salvation” or “is a time appropriate for God … is a time when God gives salvation” 6:3 shtt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure διδόντες 1 Here, the word **giving** goes with the clause “we also urge you” in [6:1](../06/01.md). It introduces an explanation of how Paul and his fellow workers serve God. In most languages, it is best to begin a new sentence with this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly links back to “we also urge” from [6:1](../06/01.md). If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to end the previous verse with a period. Alternate translation: “As we urge you to receive the grace God, we give” or “As we serve God, we give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -6:3 v3wc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδεμίαν & διδόντες προσκοπήν 1 Here, the phrase **giving no cause for offense** refers to how a person acts, so that others are not offended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “avoiding provoking others” or “doing nothing that would cause offense” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:3 v3wc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδεμίαν & διδόντες προσκοπήν 1 Here, the phrase **giving no cause for offense** refers to how a person acts so that others are not offended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “avoiding provoking others” or “doing nothing that would cause offense” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:3 sv9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν μηδενὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in anything** could refer to: (1) actions and behavior. Alternate translation: “in whatever we do” (2) people. Alternate translation: “among anybody” or “to any person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:3 he3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ μωμηθῇ ἡ διακονία 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) other people would do it. Alternate translation: “others might not blame our ministry” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God might not blame our ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:4 p6pl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν παντὶ συνιστάντες ἑαυτοὺς ὡς Θεοῦ διάκονοι 1 Here the word **as** could introduce: (1) who they are (**servants of God**) while they **commend** themselves. Alternate translation: “we who are servants of God commend ourselves in everything” (2) what it is that they must **commend** themselves to be. Alternate translation: “we commend ourselves in everything, proving that we are servants of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -746,7 +746,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 6:16 u5g3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐνοικήσω ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐνπεριπατήσω 1 These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will dwell among them; yes, I will walk among them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 6:16 g0nl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνπεριπατήσω 1 Here the author of the quotation speaks as if God would **walk** among his people. He means that God will be as close to his people as if he were walking around with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “spend time with them” or “be close to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:16 vy1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ ἔσονταί 1 Here, the word translated **themselves** switches focus from **God** to **they**. Consider using a natural way to switch the focus to **they** in your language. Alternate translation: “it is they who will be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -6:17 fe1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations διὸ & λέγει Κύριος 1 Here Paul uses the words **Therefore** and **says the Lord** to introduce a quotation that provides a result or inference from what Paul said in the previous verse. Most of the quotation is from [Isaiah 52:11](../isa/52/11.md), but the phrase **and I will welcome you** is from a Greek translation of [Ezekiel 20:34](../ezk/20/34.md). The ULT indicates that the quote is from two different passages by using new quotation marks with the last line. However, it is recommended that you treat the whole verse as one quote in your translation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could introduce the quote in a natural way which shows that it comes from the Old Testament. It may be more natural to move **says the Lord** to the beginning of the verse, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “Because of that … the Lord says {through the prophets}” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +6:17 fe1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations διὸ ἐξέλθατε ἐκ μέσου αὐτῶν καὶ ἀφορίσθητε, λέγει Κύριος, καὶ 1 Here Paul uses the words **Therefore** and **says the Lord** to introduce a quotation that provides a result or inference from what Paul said in the previous verse. Most of the quotation is from [Isaiah 52:11](../isa/52/11.md), but the phrase **and I will welcome you** is from a Greek translation of [Ezekiel 20:34](../ezk/20/34.md). The ULT indicates that the quote is from two different passages by using new quotation marks with the last line. However, it is recommended that you treat the whole verse as one quote in your translation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could introduce the quote in a natural way which shows that it comes from the Old Testament. It may be more natural to move **says the Lord** to the beginning of the verse, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “Because of that, the Lord says {through the prophets}, ‘Come out from the midst of them, and be separate, and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 6:17 peek rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐξέλθατε ἐκ μέσου αὐτῶν καὶ ἀφορίσθητε 1 Here, these two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Come out from the midst of them; yes, be separate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 6:17 z5ld rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **them** refers to people who do not follow God and who do not trust the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun refers. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers” or “of the people who do not follow God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 6:17 vfie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀκαθάρτου μὴ ἅπτεσθε 1 Here the author of the quotation uses the word **touch** to refer to interacting with someone in any way, not just by touching it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “come into contact with no unclean things” or “avoid every unclean thing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -801,8 +801,8 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 7:8 zuvp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s explanation of why he “rejoices even more” (see [7:7](../07/07.md)). This explanation continues in [7:9](../07/09.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Here is why I rejoice even more:” or “That is because,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 7:8 ptq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ καὶ 1 Here Paul is speaking as if grieving them were only a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it was actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “although” or “though.” Alternate translation: “although” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 7:8 lzww rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ ἐπιστολῇ & ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἐκείνη 1 Here Paul again refers to a letter that he previously sent to them. See how you referred to this letter in [2:3–9](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “my previous letter … the letter” or “the letter that I sent you before … that letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -7:8 wlbh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εἰ καὶ μετεμελόμην (βλέπω ὅτι ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἐκείνη, εἰ καὶ πρὸς ὥραν ἐλύπησεν ὑμᾶς) 1 Here, the phrase **Even though I did regret {it}** could go with: (1) “now I rejoice” in [7:9](../07/09.md). In other words, although Paul may have regretted sending the letter, now he rejoices. Alternate translation: “Although I did regret it—I see that that letter grieved you, if only for an hour—” (2) **I see**. In other words, Paul may have regretted sending the letter because he saw that it **grieved** the Corinthians. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to begin a new sentence with the following verse. Alternate translation: “Even though I did regret it, it was because I see that that letter grieved you, if only for an hour.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -7:8 b552 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ καὶ μετεμελόμην 1 Here, the phrase **Even though** could introduce: (1) something that Paul did in the past but does not do now. In other words, Paul wishes to indicate that he “regretted” sending the letter after he sent it, but he does not regret it now. Alternate translation: “Even though I did regret it then” (2) something that Paul did not actually do. In other words, Paul wishes to indicate that he might have “regretted” sending the letter, but there is no possibility of that now. Alternate translation: “Even though I might have regretted it”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +7:8 wlbh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εἰ καὶ μετεμελόμην (βλέπω ὅτι ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἐκείνη, εἰ καὶ πρὸς ὥραν ἐλύπησεν ὑμᾶς) 1 Here, the phrase **Even if I was regretting {it}** could go with: (1) “now I rejoice” in [7:9](../07/09.md). In other words, although Paul may have regretted sending the letter, now he rejoices. Alternate translation: “Even if I was regretting it—I see that that letter grieved you, if only for an hour—” (2) **I see**. In other words, Paul may have regretted sending the letter because he saw that it **grieved** the Corinthians. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to begin a new sentence with the following verse. Alternate translation: “Even if I was regretting it, it was because I see that that letter grieved you, if only for an hour.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +7:8 b552 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ καὶ μετεμελόμην 1 Here, the phrase **Even if** could introduce: (1) something that Paul did in the past but does not do now. In other words, Paul wishes to indicate that he “regretted” sending the letter after he sent it, but he does not regret it now. Alternate translation: “Even though I was regretting it then” (2) something that Paul did not actually do. In other words, Paul wishes to indicate that he might have “regretted” sending the letter, but there is no possibility of that now. Alternate translation: “Even though I might have regretted it”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) 7:8 vk7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy βλέπω 1 Here, the word **seeing** refers generally to “knowing” something, not just to looking with one’s eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that clearly refers to knowing. Alternate translation: “I recognize” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 7:8 ftuo rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants βλέπω 1 Here, some manuscripts have “for I see,” and a few manuscripts have “seeing.” However, the best manuscripts have “I see.” Unless your readers are already familiar with one of these other wordings, it is best to follow the ULT here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 7:8 b2xj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ καὶ 3 Here Paul is speaking as if being grieved **for an hour** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it was actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “though.” Alternate translation: “though only” or “although just” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) @@ -864,9 +864,9 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 8:1 phws rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the gift of God” or “what comes graciously from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:1 d1mj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν δεδομένην 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “that he has given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:1 xnfz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς Μακεδονίας 1 As Paul indicates in [7:5](../07/05.md), he is in **Macedonia** when he writes this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that this place was Paul’s location when he wrote the letter. Alternate translation: “of Macedonia, where I am currently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -8:2 zjd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, the word **that** could introduce: (1) an explanation or definition of the “grace of God” in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “that is, that” (2) a reason or support for what Paul said in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “which we know to be true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +8:2 zjd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, the word **that** could introduce: (1) an explanation or definition of the “grace of God” in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “that is, that” (2) a reason or support for what Paul said in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “which we know to be true because,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 8:2 usu2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πολλῇ δοκιμῇ θλίψεως 1 Here Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **severe trial** that is made up of or characterized by **affliction**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a severe trial that afflicted them” or “affliction, which was a severe trial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -8:2 b7k5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ περισσεία τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτῶν καὶ ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **abundance**, **joy**, and **poverty**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how very joyful they were and how very poor they were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:2 b7k5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ περισσεία τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτῶν καὶ ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **abundance**, **joy**, and **poverty**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how very joyful they were and how deeply impoverished they were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:2 a6td rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul is speaking of **poverty** as if it were a **deep** hole. He means that they were very poor. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their extreme poverty” or “their great poverty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:2 pr8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul is speaking of **generosity** as if it were **riches**. He means that these people had very much **generosity**, just like a rich person has very much money. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the greatness of their generosity” or “how much generosity they had” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:2 z6mt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul is using the possessive form to describe **riches** that could: (1) indicate how much **generosity** these people had. Alternate translation: “their rich generosity” (2) be made up of **generosity**. Alternate translation: “the riches that are their generosity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -890,7 +890,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 8:6 i4jd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ τὴν χάριν ταύτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what you also are graciously contributing” or “what you also are giving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:7 x7cd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἀλλ’ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a new section. It is does not primarily contrast with what Paul has already said, although it does introduce a change in focus from the Macedonians and Titus to the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section or a change in focus. Alternate translation: “Now” or “In your case,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 8:7 mv4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν παντὶ 1 Paul says **everything** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in so many things” or “in very many ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -8:7 iu8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πίστει, καὶ λόγῳ, καὶ γνώσει, καὶ πάσῃ σπουδῇ, καὶ τῇ ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν ἀγάπῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, **speech**, **knowledge**, **earnestness**, and **love**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that is, you are faithful, proper in what you speak, knowledgeable about many things, very earnest, and full of the love we have for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:7 iu8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πίστει, καὶ λόγῳ, καὶ γνώσει, καὶ πάσῃ σπουδῇ, καὶ τῇ ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν ἀγάπῃ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith**, **speech**, **knowledge**, **earnestness**, and **love**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that is, you are faithful, proper in what you speak, knowledgeable about many things, very earnest, and full of how we have loved you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:7 hy1o rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **from us in you**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “from you in us.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 8:7 zhg5 ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Here, the phrase **from us in you** could indicate that: (1) the **love** is how Paul and his fellow workers feel about the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “that we have for you” (2) Paul and those with him enabled or caused the Corinthians to have **love**. Alternate translation: “that came from us and is now in you” 8:7 gqz3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ χάριτι 1 Here, the word **grace** refers to what it did in [8:4](../08/04.md), [6](../08/06.md): being able to contribute money to what Paul was collecting for believers in Jerusalem. If possible, translate it as you did in those verses. Alternate translation: “in this gift” or “in this gracious act of giving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1092,10 +1092,12 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr 10:3 k7h8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor οὐ & στρατευόμεθα 1 Here and in [10:4–6](../10/04.md), Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were waging a **war**. He means that they proclaim the good news and defend it and other believers against people and powers that try to corrupt the good news and hurt believers. Paul does not mean that they are actually killing people or fighting with physical weapons. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “we are like people who wage war, but not” or “we do not fight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 10:3 gpd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ σάρκα 1 You should translate this phrase as you did in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “according to what humans value” or “according to a human perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 10:4 ge87 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([10:3](../10/03.md)) about waging war not according to the flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -10:4 uf5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor τὰ & ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν οὐ σαρκικὰ, ἀλλὰ δυνατὰ τῷ Θεῷ πρὸς καθαίρεσιν ὀχυρωμάτων, λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες 1 Here, just as in [10:3](../10/03.md), Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were involved in **warfare**. In this verse, he specifically speaks about their **weapons**, which God empowers. He also refers to **strongholds**, which are places that an army chooses to defend. He defines the **strongholds** as **strategies** or arguments against him and the gospel. Paul means that God empowers him and his fellow workers to defeat and destroy these arguments. Paul does not mean that they are actually killing people and destroying physical strongholds. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “what we use to defend ourselves are like weapons of warfare that are not fleshly but are powerful to God for overcoming strategies and arguments, which are like strongholds” or “we do not fight with fleshly weapons but with arguments that are powerful to God for the defeating of powerful enemies and strategies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +10:4 uf5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor τὰ & ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν οὐ σαρκικὰ, ἀλλὰ δυνατὰ τῷ Θεῷ πρὸς καθαίρεσιν ὀχυρωμάτων, λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες 1 Here, just as in [10:3](../10/03.md), Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were involved in **warfare**. In this verse, he specifically speaks about their **weapons** and about their enemies’ **strongholds**. He defines the **strongholds** as **strategies** or arguments against him and the gospel. Paul means by this that God empowers him and his fellow workers to prove that these arguments are false. Paul does not mean that they are physically fighting against people or destroying physical strongholds. Preserve the metaphor if it is clear in your language or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “what we use to defend ourselves are like weapons of warfare that are not fleshly but are powerful to God for overcoming strategies and arguments, which are like strongholds” or “we do not fight with fleshly weapons but with arguments that are powerful to God for the defeating of powerful enemies and strategies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 10:4 d1gj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὰ & ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **weapons** that are used to fight in **warfare**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different form. Alternate translation: “our weapons for fighting” or “the weapons with which we wage war” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 10:4 ohuj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **warfare**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with which we fight” or “we use to wage war” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n +10:4 rk8i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy σαρκικὰ 1 Here, **fleshly** represents what is natural and human as opposed to what is spiritual and godly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not according to natural human wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 10:4 cluj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δυνατὰ τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here, the phrase **powerful to God** indicates that the weapons are **powerful** because God makes them powerful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “are made powerful by God” or “have God’s power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:4 ztdd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet πρὸς καθαίρεσιν ὀχυρωμάτων, λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες, 1 The phrases **the tearing down of strongholds** and **tearing down strategies** mean similar things. Paul is using the two phrases together for emphasis, with the the second phrase defining the first phrase. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “for the tearing down of powerful strategies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 10:5 xuz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor καὶ πᾶν ὕψωμα ἐπαιρόμενον κατὰ τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ αἰχμαλωτίζοντες πᾶν νόημα εἰς τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, just as in [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were involved in a war. In this verse, he speaks about **every high thing**, which are fortifications or walls. He means that he and his fellow workers defeat or discredit anything that claims to be as great or important as **the knowledge of God**. Paul also speaks about taking thoughts **captive**. Just as the victor in a war takes the conquered people **captive**, so Paul and his fellow workers wish to take peoples’ thoughts **captive** so that these people are obedient to Christ. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “and anything that is like a high fortress that raises itself against the knowledge of God, and we control every thought like we we were taking it captive into the obedience of Christ” or “and anything that proudly claims to be more important than the knowledge of God, and we take control of every thought into the obedience of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) 10:5 b74d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **knowledge** that is about **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “the knowledge about God” or “the knowledge that concerns God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 10:5 vm1a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **knowledge**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “knowing God” or ”what we know about God“ (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])